10.02.2013 Views

EIB/KNX Data - EIBMARKT® GmbH Holding

EIB/KNX Data - EIBMARKT® GmbH Holding

EIB/KNX Data - EIBMARKT® GmbH Holding

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

www.eibmarkt.de<br />

info@eibmarkt.de


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Topic overview:<br />

English - Manual 4<br />

Introduction 6<br />

Preconditions 8<br />

Examples of applications 12<br />

User manual 15<br />

Elvis structure 16<br />

Installation 19<br />

Start up and terminate 21<br />

Operation 23<br />

Administration 27<br />

Diagnosis 29<br />

Terminal 30<br />

Error messages 31<br />

Appendix 32<br />

Installation 33<br />

Project software 35<br />

Basic Version 36<br />

Load project... 37<br />

<strong>Data</strong>points 40<br />

<strong>Data</strong>point groups 43<br />

RS232/USB-Port 45<br />

<strong>Data</strong>point Requests 49<br />

User management 50<br />

Alarm management 54<br />

Message ports 56<br />

Message recipients 58<br />

Messages 59<br />

Professional Version 60<br />

Support 64<br />

Navigation 65<br />

Start screen 67<br />

Burglar alarm system 71<br />

Purpose 72<br />

Features 73<br />

Preconditions 74<br />

Topology 80<br />

Central terminal 82<br />

Alarm outputs 88<br />

Reference contact 91<br />

Inputs (contacts) 93<br />

Inputs (detectors) 96<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 101<br />

Info-Alarm-Message 109<br />

Purpose 110<br />

Features 111<br />

Preconditions 112<br />

Function description 114<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 122<br />

Outside lighting matrix 126<br />

Purpose 127<br />

Features 129<br />

Preconditions 130<br />

Function description 132<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 140<br />

Operating Console 144<br />

Purpose 145<br />

Page 1


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features 146<br />

Preconditions 147<br />

Function description 150<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 155<br />

Reminder function 159<br />

Purpose 160<br />

Features 161<br />

Preconditions 162<br />

Function description 163<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 168<br />

4-Side blind automatics 170<br />

Purpose 171<br />

Features 173<br />

Preconditions 174<br />

Function description 177<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 182<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA001 184<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA002 186<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA003 188<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA004 190<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Inputs 192<br />

Climate Console 193<br />

Purpose 194<br />

Features 195<br />

Preconditions 196<br />

Function description 198<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 204<br />

Media Console 209<br />

Scenario-Manager 210<br />

Purpose 211<br />

Features 212<br />

Preconditions 213<br />

Function description 216<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 220<br />

Audio Console 223<br />

Purpose 224<br />

Features 225<br />

Preconditions 226<br />

Function description 228<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 231<br />

Sensor System Toolbar 235<br />

Purpose 237<br />

Features 238<br />

Preconditions 239<br />

Function description 241<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 244<br />

Time Switches 246<br />

Purpose 247<br />

Features 248<br />

Preconditions 249<br />

Function description 250<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 253<br />

Weather station / sensors 255<br />

Purpose 256<br />

Features 257<br />

Preconditions 258<br />

Function description 260<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 264<br />

Central Command Terminal 267<br />

Purpose 269<br />

Page 2


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features 270<br />

Preconditions 271<br />

Function description 272<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 277<br />

Page 3


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

English-Manual<br />

Version 05/10<br />


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 5


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Introduction<br />

How much the software costs? ---> Click here...!<br />

Unique visualization package can be easily adapted to the<br />

environment by the user – even without programming<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong> has put a new generation of their visualization software package IQHOME.NET V2.4.xxx, former „<br />

Genius Modular“, on the market.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong> has put a new generation of their visualization software package<br />

IQHOME.NET V2.4.xxx, former „Genius Modular“, on the market.<br />

>>IQHOME.NET is unique because it represents the only visualization tool at a reasonable<br />

price that can be used without disposing of any programming knowledge Equipped with a „Server Configurator“ in its Basic version the 500 available<br />

communication objects (group addresses, bus connections, protocols, users etc..), bus<br />

connections/protocols etc. are managed). Thus, all project modules provided are ready for<br />

operation within a relatively short time.


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

IQHOME.NET can be installed on any standard PC (also fanless design PCs or pannel PCs with<br />

touch) with 32 Bit Microsoft operating systems (NT, 2000, XP). User release is provided by a<br />

hardware dongle (USB or Parallel) which permits independence of the users and installation<br />

of the software as often as they like.<br />

According to Mr. Labahn most visualization software consists of complex program languages<br />

and can often be modified by programmers only.<br />

IQHOME.NET is modular and open. All program modules provided can be put into operation<br />

using a simple „Server Configurator“ (Basic version). By means of a visualization interface<br />

all module parameters are adapted online to the application conditions.<br />

Thanks to the Professional version IQHOME.NET is open and can be viewed completely,<br />

reprogrammed, modularly extended and graphically modified by users who dispose of the<br />

respective knowledge. Extension possibilities are almost unlimited. The extra charge for the<br />

Professional version is approx. EUR 300.00. It can be ordered separately at any later time.<br />

With ©IQHOME.NET you buy a valuable product that incorporates many years of expertise<br />

and represents functionality and design. The functions and designs included in ©IQHOME.NET<br />

are individual developments of <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong> (calculations, scripts, programmings,<br />

graphics) and are available in the project software ELVIS only if ©IQHOME.NET is used.<br />

By opening a physical medium (CD-ROM, DVD, or other medium) or by downloading ©<br />

IQHOME.NET & ELVIS files and their use the buyer accepts the special contract and license<br />

conditions.<br />

Do not forget to fill in and return the license certificate/s. Otherwise you are not entitled to<br />

updates and support!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 7


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Es sind zwei verschiedenen Versionen verfügbar:<br />

(Basic) und (Professional)<br />

©IQHOME.NET is always delivered with at least one license for the runtime software, LAN<br />

operating terminal (local or to be used in the network) and 500 communication objects (to<br />

enter the group addresses) as well as, depending on the bundle version, with a limited ( Basic<br />

) or fully applicable (Professional) project software, if you have not made another selection.<br />

Both versions can be ordered either with or without Support Service. The upgrade for the<br />

project license from Basic to Professional must be ordered directly at IT <strong>GmbH</strong><br />

(www.it-gmbh.de).<br />

The ELVIS project software (Professional) must be ordered directly at IT <strong>GmbH</strong><br />

(www.it-gmbh.de). This is due to the specific license rights. Purchase of a project software<br />

full license must be proven (by sending the invoice number of IT <strong>GmbH</strong> by mail). Only then<br />

you will receive the key to release the full project version of IQHOME.NET.<br />

©IQHOME.NET is based on the Profi-Software ELVIS (IT-<strong>GmbH</strong>).<br />

Using the Professional Version with IOCOMP control elements the project engineer has full<br />

access to all possible project data of the database and the operating terminal. In its Basic<br />

version use of the supplied project software is limited. The difference between this version<br />

and the Professional version is that there is no project access to the operating terminal<br />

(visualization). Thus, in the Basic Version the visualization cannot be extended. The<br />

Professional version is recommended for professional users who dispose a of lot of<br />

experience.<br />

With regard to content and function both versions are equal in ©IQHOME.NET.<br />

In its Basic version the project software cannot access the visualization surface. This version<br />

is recommended for non-professionals, Standard <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> users (It is always possible to<br />

upgrade Basic to Professional). In the Basic version access to the database includes the<br />

following:<br />

� Manage data points (their project-specific group addresses)<br />

� Communication objects cannot be deleted or added<br />

� Edit data point text, data point group<br />

� <strong>Data</strong> point connections, communication ports (COM interfaces, bus protocols etc.)<br />

� <strong>Data</strong> point requests (cyclical, demand, run-up etc.)<br />

� Add users, user groups, grant rights etc.<br />

� Define alarm data points and their characteristics etc.<br />

� Define message connections and their characteristics etc.<br />

� Define messages and their characteristics etc.<br />

Thus, an immediate start and use of ©IQHOME.NET is possible within a very short time and<br />

without any problems. Similar to the ETS you just fill in your group addresses and adjust the<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> connection and the protocol type (BCU, FT1.2) and off we go. If you want to make<br />

comprehensive modifications or extensions later, you can order an upgrade to Professional at<br />

Page 8


any time.<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Hardware preconditions (minimum requirements & recommendations):<br />

1.<br />

©IQHOME.NET is a software and consists of several program modules. The software can be<br />

installed on any standard PC, Design PC (www.hushtechnologies.net), Server or Panel PC<br />

incl. Touch with 32-Bit-Windows operating system (XP, 2000, NT) and the following<br />

minimum requirements to the hardware:<br />

� IP3/CELERON, 1Ghz, 256 MBRAM, 16 MB graphics board with resolution 1024x768 Pixel<br />

(XGA) True Color (32Bit), RS232 interface or USB and visual display unit (Monitor,<br />

Touch, Beamer etc.).<br />

Recommendation:<br />

� IP4/CELERON, 3Ghz, 512 MBRAM, 32 MB graphics board with resolution 1024x768 Pixel<br />

(XGA) True Color (32Bit), RS232 interface or USB, network controller, sound board and<br />

visual display unit (Monitor, Touch, Beamer etc.).<br />

2.<br />

The PC used must be connected to the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> bus by means of a communication interface<br />

RS232 or USB, e.g. JUNG 2130, 2130 USB or 2130 USB REG, to ensure that the runtime<br />

software (process server with ©IQHOME.NET database) has a bidirectional access to the <strong>EIB</strong><br />

bus system to transmit the data to the operating terminal (visualization) and vice versa.<br />

INFO:<br />

There is a multitude of options for central visualization and operation such as a touch screen<br />

monitor (from 15") parallel to the standard PC with the operating terminal (visualization ©<br />

IQHOME.NET), that has an elegant and fashionable stainless steel design and can be used as<br />

concealed operating panel (up to 100 m from the PC with 2 pcs. Cat5 lines and<br />

Line-Extenders).<br />

Example Touchscreen 17"<br />

or<br />

Example Touchscreen 15" combined with Panel PC<br />

Another option is the integration in a concealed combined PC-Touch with screen types of<br />

15"-17". Another interesting multimedia possibility to use ©IQHOME.NET would be the<br />

integration in a fancy Hush Design PC (fanless) for the living room.<br />

Page 9


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

www.hushtechnologies.net<br />

The ©IQHOME.NET operating terminal (visualization) can also be called from another PC<br />

integrated in the network. To do so, you will need a network controller.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong> special:<br />

Ref. No.: N510000_IQs<br />

(To the input in the search mask under www.eibmarkt.com)<br />

Manufacturer: <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT<br />

©IQHOME.NET<br />

Intelligent <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> visualization software package for your house, incl. communication<br />

server for <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>!<br />

Product version: 500 DP Special Edition (DP= data points / communication objects) with<br />

USB licence dongle. The bundle is licensed for max. 1 project with a runtime licence for a<br />

maximum of 500 communication objects (each object can be combined with several group<br />

addresses [up to 255 characters], see data point list in Download center) as well as 1 unit<br />

LAN operating terminal and includes no support, incl. project planning software "Server<br />

Configurator" to manage the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects (group addresses), bus<br />

connections, protocols, users etc..<br />

Design PC [silver] as communication server for <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> visualizations, completely fanless<br />

for continuous operation. Not only high-quality and exquisite design but also extremely silent<br />

(fanless). Depending on equipment and type, this system combined with IQHOME.NET<br />

represents an absolute highlight for intelligent lifestyle, multimedia communication and a<br />

variety of functions! Being the size of a normal DVD player, this device can easily be<br />

integrated into an existing multimedia system or used as additional separate working<br />

terminal. In connection with IQHOME.NET and a LCD/TFT television and/or separate touch<br />

screen or standard monitor it is a strong communication console. (provided DVI or VGA<br />

connection with 1024x768 to board and TV)<br />

The communication server as integrated component of each <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> system can be<br />

extended to a complete management & multimedia system. However, this basic<br />

configuration already represents a sophisticated equipment optimized and tested for the<br />

Page 10


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

application of ambitious <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication server solutions such as IQHOME.NET.<br />

Hush Mini ITX PC system fanless, consisting of: VIA EPIA MII 12000 Board 1,2GHz incl.<br />

CardBus Controller Type I/II and Compact Flash Slot, integrated 32MB VIA Castlerock<br />

AGP onboard graphics board (max. 1280x1024 Pixel), 1x DIMM socket DDR 512 MB, max.<br />

1GB interfaces onboard: 2x USB 2.0 Ports, 1x IEEE 1394, S-Video out, 1x RCA Port, 6<br />

channel audio VT1616, 10/100 Base-T Ethernet LAN Adapter VIA VT6103, serial, mouse and<br />

keyboard connection, 40GB Seagate hard disk 7200 RPM, Teac CD ROM drive SlimLine,<br />

Hush Mini ITX aluminium case completely fanless, 90 Watt ext. power supply unit fanless,<br />

Microsoft XP Professional Multilingual pre-installed, MS Works Suite 2005, Computer<br />

Associates eTrust Antivirus v7.1 OEM Edition for Windows.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 11


Example version 1:<br />

Example version 2:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Examples of applications<br />

Page 12


Example version 3:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 13


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 14


1 Welcome<br />

1.1 Introduction<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

User manual<br />

Congratulations on purchasing Elvis, a very efficient visualisation system for modern building<br />

system technology. This manual describes the main program parts, their installation and<br />

operation. In order to understand the contents, knowledge of the use of current Microsoft<br />

operating systems is required.<br />

1.2 Conventions<br />

The following conventions were used for this manual:<br />

Bold print either highlights important terms, denotes a menu command or pressing a<br />

button. Italic print indicates a variable text, e.g. Project file indicates that the name of your<br />

project file is mentioned here. > and >> The symbol > in a brief description denotes an<br />

operational sequence. In<br />

front of the sequence symbol > there may be a site specification e.g. main menu or context<br />

menu.<br />

Example: main menu > Edit > Properties properties page > General means that in the<br />

main menu you should first select the Edit menu<br />

command and in it the Properties command, then proceed in the dialogue which has<br />

opened up to the General properties page.<br />

If a double mouse click is necessary the sequence symbol will be doubled >>. The terms<br />

left/right mouse button refer to the standard W indows setting. Screen images and operating<br />

sequences refer to a Windows 2000 operating system. If you use another operating system,<br />

your display or operation may deviate from the illustrations in this manual.<br />

1.3 Latest information<br />

Information that could no longer be included in this manual may possibly be found in a<br />

readme file in the installation directory. Announcements, tips, answers to FAQs as well as<br />

current Elvis documentation may be found in the Internet: http://www.it-gmbh.de.<br />

1.4 If you require further help<br />

If you have queries about this product please contact the designer of your Elvis visualisation.<br />

Please read the diagnosis and error messages chapter first.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 15


2 Elvis structure<br />

2.1 Modules<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Elvis structure<br />

In Elvis not all jobs are performed by a single program, instead the various tasks are<br />

completed by several different modules (program parts). The modules may be flexibly<br />

distributed in networks.<br />

2.1.1 Elvis terminal<br />

The terminal module features a user-friendly graphic user interface to display and change<br />

the system status. The name of this module is Elvis terminal. The number of Elvis terminals<br />

that may be started simultaneously is only limited by your license (see Software protection).<br />

The application name is: elvisrun.exe.<br />

2.1.2 Elvis process server<br />

The central module contains a process image (the current process values). As such it can<br />

inform the command modules about the current system status at any time. Moreover, the<br />

central module can further process the process data in the form of calculations, perform<br />

schedules, create records and issue messages. The central module is called the Elvis<br />

process server. The application name is: elvissvr.exe.<br />

2.1.3 Ports<br />

These connection modules supply the communication between the Elvis process server and<br />

the processes and are called bus connections. Possible servers for bus connections are:<br />

Elvis <strong>EIB</strong> Port (for <strong>EIB</strong> access, library: elvisei3.dll)<br />

Elvis System Port (for system resources, library: elvissys.dll)<br />

Elvis Simulator Port (for simulation of all ports, application: elvissim.exe)<br />

Elvis Custom Port (serial scriptable port, library: elviscpd.dll)<br />

OPC Server (for LON, Profibus etc)<br />

All servers with the exception of the OPC server are supplied with Elvis. The latter may be<br />

obtained from other suppliers. The bus connections required in the project are automatically<br />

started on the Elvis process server start-up and are also closed when it is closed. OPC<br />

servers may be an exception to this.<br />

2.1.4 Message ports<br />

These connection modules supply the communication between the Elvis process server and<br />

the output devices for messages and are called message ports. Possible servers for<br />

communication are:<br />

ElvisMsg SMS Connection (SMS/Pager services, library: portsms.dll)<br />

ElvisMsg SMTP Connection (Email, library: portsmtp.dll)<br />

ElvisMsg MAPI Connection (Email and fax, library: portmapi.dll)<br />

ElvisMsg Print Connection (output on printer, library: portprint.dll)<br />

ElvisMsg TAPI Connection (Voice, library: porttapi.dll)<br />

ElvisMsg File Connection (File, library: portfile.dll)<br />

Special settings must be made on the computer for some servers or special hardware (e.g.<br />

modem) and applications/drivers be featured:<br />

ElvisMsg SMS Connection ->Modem, service configuration with MMCfg.exe<br />

ElvisMsg SMTP Connection<br />

ElvisMsg MAPI Connection -> MS Exchange / Outlook / other MAPI suppliers<br />

Page 16


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

ElvisMsg Print Connection -> printers (e.g. addressable via LPT1)<br />

ElvisMsg TAPI Connection -> Voice modem that supports TAPI2<br />

ElvisMsg File Connection<br />

The required message port servers are started and closed automatically as necessary.<br />

2.1.5 Administration console<br />

Configuration settings for users, bus and message ports may be made via the administration<br />

console. The console document is: ElvisAdm.msc.<br />

2.1.6 Remote server control<br />

The remote server control is used to check the status of the process server and its<br />

components, display the logged-in users as well as start and close the process server<br />

(remotely). The database may also be replaced via the remote server control without losing<br />

the current settings (e.g, switching times in the schedules). The application name is:<br />

elvisrsc.exe.<br />

2.1.7 Elvis debugger<br />

The debugger may be used to display and change the process image contained in the<br />

process server and to examine process server calculations (see Elvis debugger). The<br />

application name is: elvisdbg.exe.<br />

2.1.8 Elvis runtime<br />

The process server, the bus connections and the terminals are called Elvis runtime. The<br />

module used to create the visualization is called the Elvis developer. The Elvis developer is<br />

not part of the Elvis runtime.<br />

2.2 Files<br />

2.2.1 Project files<br />

The data for the terminals, i.e. user interfaces with drawings, pictures and control elements<br />

are stored in the project file. This project file has the file extension „iep“ (i = IT <strong>GmbH</strong> / e =<br />

Elvis / p = project). The data for the process server, i.e. the datapoints, schedules, history<br />

and requesting intervals, calculations etc. are stored in a database. This database has the<br />

file extension „db“. To access the database the database manager<br />

„Sybase SQL Anywhere <strong>Data</strong>base Engine“ is used. The database manager is started and<br />

closed automatically by the process server. The Elvis developer is used to create and change<br />

the project file and database.<br />

2.2.2 Protocol files<br />

Three different protocol files (ending: „elf“ = Elvis Log File) may be created, administered<br />

and used. They are stored in the log directory. Whether protocol files are created or not<br />

depends on the project planning. Protocol file names are generated automatically. The file<br />

name format is: xyyyy.elf. The x denotes the protocol type (A, H, S), the yyyy an<br />

alphanumerical counter (0001 to zzzz - thus max. 1,679,616 files). The alarm files (A =<br />

Alarm) contain the time, datapoint names, alarm status and if necessary the user who has<br />

acknowledged the alarm along with their comments. The history files (H = History) contain<br />

the time, datapoint name, its property and value.<br />

The system files (S = System) contain the time the user logged in and out. All information in<br />

the protocol files is included as binary data. Thus, the protocol files are protected against<br />

manipulation and very compact. New protocol files are created regularly after 24 hours as<br />

well as on starting the process server. If a protocol file becomes larger than 256 Kbyte a new<br />

Page 17


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

file is also commenced. The protocol files may be opened by the protocol viewer, viewed and<br />

exported as a csv file. The current files in each case are opened by the process server. If<br />

their contents are to be viewed, new files must be created. To do so, please use the remote<br />

server control (> Properties > General)<br />

2.2.3 Diagnosis files<br />

elvissvr.log und elvisrun.log files may be created for the diagnosis of the process server and<br />

terminal. These files are only required for error location. The diagnosis chapter describes how<br />

diagnosis files are created.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 18


3 Installation<br />

3.1 Software protection<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Installation<br />

One dongle is required for each runtime license regardless of how many terminals are<br />

featured. The dongle is simply plugged into the PC on which the Elvis server is run. How<br />

many datapoints are maximally possible and how many terminals may be operated<br />

simultaneously by the server is entered in the dongle whereby the number of terminals<br />

installed in the network is immaterial, only the active terminals (= floating licences ) count.<br />

Special devices such as the debugger or remote server control are not counted here and may<br />

always be started.<br />

The installation of the Elvis runtime also includes that of drivers for the dongle<br />

(=WIBU-KEY). The information in the WIBU-KEY may be read and also changed via these<br />

drivers. To do so use the control panel of your operating system. If you acquire additional<br />

terminals the information in the dongle may be updated by email.<br />

3.2 Process server installation<br />

3.2.1 Installation<br />

To install the process server simply install the entire Elvis run time including the debugger<br />

on your computer. Doing so you also install a terminal which you are bound to need for test<br />

purposes. In addition to installation the project database (*.db) must be copied to the<br />

computer on which the process server is installed.<br />

3.2.2 Configuration for access by network<br />

In order to register terminals with the process server via a network, settings for DCOM must<br />

be performed. Start the DCOM configuration (as administrator of your computer) by:<br />

Start>Execute... > Open: dcomcnfg > OK<br />

The following settings must be checked and set:<br />

Activate DCOM on the computer:<br />

Standard properties: activate DCOM on this computer<br />

Configure the security settings for the process server:<br />

Application: Elvis Server > Properties...<br />

General: Authentication level: (none)<br />

Security: use standard access authorisations<br />

Security: use user-defined start authorisations<br />

Process... > Allow anyone to start<br />

Determine a specific user under whose account the Elvis server should run:<br />

Identity: this user User: <br />

3.2.3 Configuration of ports for bus access via network<br />

If bus ports (e.g. Falcon) are to be accessed via the network, their DCOM-setting should be<br />

performed analogously to the Elvis process server settings.<br />

3.3 Terminal installation<br />

To install a terminal just select the equivalent option during setup. In addition to installation,<br />

the project file (*.iep) must be copied to the computer in which the terminal is installed.<br />

3.4 Uninstall<br />

Page 19


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

To uninstall the Elvis runtime use the Windows installer (control panel > software).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 20


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Start up and terminate<br />

4 Start up and terminate<br />

4.1 Start menu<br />

Default entries in the start menu/programs/Elvis are created for the process server, terminal<br />

and administration console modules during installation.<br />

4.2 Shortcuts<br />

Shortcuts may also be created for the process server and terminals to permit user-friendly<br />

module starting. As link target besides the name of the module the file to be opened<br />

(database or project file) may also be specified.<br />

Example for the terminal:<br />

Link>Properties>Link>Target:<br />

D:\Programs\Elvis\ElvisRun.exe D:\projects\.iep<br />

4.3 Process server<br />

4.3.1 Start up<br />

If the process server is started via the start menu an open file dialogue is displayed to<br />

specify the database. Once specified, the database manager (SQL Projectname) and the<br />

process server (two gear wheels) are indicated in the symbol bar. Only one process server<br />

should always be started on a computer. Note: a process server may load and administrate<br />

several projects (databases). This should not be used in practice.<br />

4.3.2 Command line parameters<br />

If the process server is started via Start>Execute... or a shortcut, command line parameters<br />

may be specified:<br />

/regserver -> COM registration<br />

/install -> Registration as service<br />

/unregserver -> Unregistration of the COM and service registration<br />

If the process server is started as a service, it features no user interface. The database is<br />

specified via the administration console or manually registered in Windows:<br />

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\IT <strong>GmbH</strong>\Elvis\ElvisSvr\<strong>Data</strong>base = <strong>Data</strong>basepath<br />

4.3.3 Terminate<br />

The process server may be terminated via the context menu (click symbol with right mouse<br />

button) or the remote server control may be opened.<br />

To terminate the process server the user name and password must be specified. Not every<br />

user is authorized to terminate the process server.<br />

4.4 Terminal<br />

4.4.1 Start up<br />

W hen the terminal is started via the start menu an open file dialogue is displayed to specify<br />

the project file. Once specified a log-in dialogue is opened for logging into a process server.<br />

Here the user name and password must be entered. The terminal may be protected against<br />

unauthorized closing, to do so set „password must be specified to close“.<br />

4.4.2 Logging into a non-local process server<br />

Page 21


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

If the process server has not been started locally (on this computer) the computer on which<br />

the process server runs must be additionally selected (computer name or IP address).<br />

Depending on the user group (user profile) users have various rights to open pages as well<br />

as to view and change status, schedules, histories. The user groups are created by the<br />

visualization designer.<br />

4.4.3 Command line parameters<br />

If the terminal is started via Start>Execute... or a shortcut, command line parameters may<br />

be specified:<br />

/regserver -> COM registration<br />

/mdi -> terminal with several pages (multiple document interface)<br />

/k -> full screen image (kiosk mode)<br />

/nologo -> start without banner (splash screen)<br />

/s=computername or IPaddress -> if process server not local<br />

/u=username<br />

4.5 Remote server control<br />

The remote server control is started via the start menu (Start > Program > Elvis > Remote<br />

control) or if the process server is started locally via the process server symbol (Context<br />

menu > Status...).<br />

Note: the remote server control is not required in normal operation.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 22


5 Operation<br />

5.1 General<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Operation<br />

The Elvis terminal is used to operate the visualization. The terminal indicates:<br />

a main window with title bar<br />

the menu bar<br />

the symbol bar<br />

the status bar<br />

the operating range within which the project planner’s pages are displayed<br />

The display of these elements may be set via the view menu options.<br />

5.2 Terminal menu commands<br />

5.2.1 File menu<br />

Log on as... By entering a user name and password another user may log on. Optionally a<br />

password may be requested when the new user wishes to log off. Open page... A specific<br />

page may be selected and opened from the page list. Print... Prints the current view. Page<br />

display Print preview<br />

Print setup... Close<br />

5.2.2 View menu<br />

Symbol bar display or hide the symbol bar<br />

Status bar display or hide the status bar<br />

Alarm bar display or hide the alarm bar<br />

Full screen change to full screen mode<br />

Update update the display<br />

Options...> Alarm determine the terminal reactions when an alarm occurs<br />

Options...> Diagnosis activate and determine the scope of the terminal diagnosis<br />

5.2.3 Help menu<br />

About... display information (especially version information) on the terminal and system.<br />

5.3 Page structure<br />

5.3.1 General<br />

In the main window graphic elements, images and controls are displayed on pages created<br />

by the project planner. Additional operations such as changing to another screen page or<br />

dialogue window may be planned. Only one screen page at a time is displayed as default.<br />

5.3.2 Graphic elements and pictures<br />

The project planner may have created graphic elements (vector graphics) or embedded<br />

pictures in the pages. These are used for design purposes. The graphic elements are depicted<br />

by the Elvis terminal. The embedded images (e.g. BMP, JPG, GIF formats etc.) are depicted<br />

via OLE (object linking and embedding). To display these elements programs are required<br />

that are not supplied with Elvis, but for common formats are in<br />

most cases installed and registered on a PC.<br />

5.3.3 Controls<br />

Page 23


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

A control is an element that permits the display and change of data point values in the<br />

terminal. Controls are buttons, analogue inputs, status displays, analogue outputs, digital<br />

tools, x/t writers, text elements, video image displays or schedules.<br />

5.3.4 Change page<br />

Screen pages may contain elements by means of which you may jump to other screen<br />

pages. In order to perform such a change, click the appropriate element with the mouse. In<br />

order to change to a specific screen page execute the following command Open File or click<br />

the button in the symbol bar. The Open page dialogue will be displayed in which you may<br />

select the screen page you wish to activate. Via the button you may jump between the last<br />

two screen pages displayed. If you press function key F5 or the button the screen page<br />

currently displayed will be<br />

5.4 Alarm list<br />

The alarm file entries (see 2.2.2) are displayed (see view menu for opening) in the alarm<br />

list. You can filter which alarms are to be displayed:<br />

all: All alarm messages are displayed in the list.<br />

active: Only currently active alarm messages are displayed in the list.<br />

unacknowledged: Only unacknowledged alarm messages are displayed in the list.<br />

when: Date from which point the entries are displayed.<br />

The following symbols are used to display the alarm status:<br />

the upper limit value has been exceeded<br />

the lower limit value has not be reached<br />

the alarm has been acknowledged<br />

the value is (back) in the valid range<br />

In addition to that, the time and a designation are specified in the list. In case of<br />

acknowledgements the user is also specified and possibly the acknowledgement comments.<br />

Alarms may only be acknowledged as long as the alarm is issued. Double click on an alarm<br />

in the list to open the dialogue for acknowledgement. Comments may be entered here.<br />

5.5 Schedules<br />

5.5.1 General<br />

A schedule effects the change of datapoint values to specified times at specified values. W ith<br />

Elvis all manner of variables (buttons, values, texts etc.) may be changed via schedules. The<br />

project planner determines which datapoints may be changed by a schedule. The times and<br />

values are determined by the user. The switching times and values for the datapoints are<br />

stored centrally in a database and may be accessed from each terminal. Schedules are also<br />

subject to user administration supervision and may only be viewed and changed with the<br />

appropriate authorization.<br />

Schedules are day-based. At midnight all schedules for the new day are started.<br />

Three types of day are differentiated:<br />

Page 24


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Weekday is a day on which the respective default schedule for the day (Monday to Sunday)<br />

is to be started. Special date is a special date on which each year the same special schedule<br />

is to be started. It will be a fixed date or a date relating to Eastertide. Special day is a special<br />

day on which once only a particular special program is to be started. The default and special<br />

days are determined in the schedules respectively. These<br />

specifications do not influence other schedules. The special dates are determined via the<br />

administration console and apply to all schedules. Several special dates may also be grouped<br />

together there.<br />

5.5.2 Schedule control<br />

The schedule control (ElvisScd.ocx) is used to enter and change the required values at the<br />

respective time. A schedule control element may be opened via the schedule symbol.<br />

The schedule control element displays a calendar by means of which the day is selected. The<br />

selected day is shaded in grey. In the example the 8th of January 2005 has been selected.<br />

Underneath the required values may be entered under the switching times for the listed<br />

datapoints. By entering or changing values a special day is first of all created. If you only<br />

wish the entered value to be on this day you have finished. You have<br />

created a special day. Special days are displayed in bold in the calendar. If you wish the<br />

entered values for this week day or other week days to be a default, actuate the „Define as<br />

standard Schedule...“ button . The required week days may now be entered in a dialogue<br />

window. The special day thus becomes a standard day. If you also wish to determine the<br />

entered values for other days, but not related to weekdays, actuate the „Copy schedule..“<br />

button. You may select the days that are to be identical in a dialog window with a calendar.<br />

By dragging the mouse a block of several days may also be selected. If you wish to put back<br />

a special day a standard day actuate the „Return to standard<br />

program“ button. If you have made changes to the current day on closing the control<br />

element you will be asked whether the schedule for the present day is to be restarted. If you<br />

wish so, the value immediately before the current time will be set for each datapoint.<br />

Telegrams may also be sent in this way.<br />

Page 25


5.6 Histories<br />

5.6.1 General<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

A history effects the cyclical storing of values in files (see: Protocol files) . W hich values are<br />

recorded as well as the time intervals between recordings is determined by the project<br />

planner. The data is centrally stored with the time in protocol files (see 2.2.2) by the process<br />

server and is accessible from each terminal. The histories are subject to user administration<br />

supervision and may only be viewed with the appropriate authorization.<br />

5.6.2 History control<br />

The history control (ElvisHis.ocx) is used to display the recorded values. The display may be<br />

changed via a symbol bar.<br />

�<br />

Button functions:<br />

Left cursor: scroll back (shifts the display back in time by approx. 2/3)<br />

Calendar: day selection<br />

Right cursor: scroll forward (shifts the display forward in time by approx. 2/3)<br />

Graph: graphical illustration<br />

Table: tabular illustration<br />

Pen: for online / offline control element change (the history itself cannot be interrupted)<br />

Magnifying glass: for zooming (+ = zoom in, - = zoom out)<br />

Printer: for printing the current display.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 26


6 Administration<br />

6.1 Administration console<br />

6.1.1 General<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Administration<br />

The administration console is opened via the start menu (Start > Programs > Elvis > Admin<br />

Console). An entry „ElvisAdmSnapin“ is featured in the console master data. Here settings<br />

for the process server and terminal are possible. The active projects (databases) are featured<br />

under the process server. A special authorization is required to open a project. Logging-in is<br />

by user name and password.<br />

6.1.2 Users<br />

Here all users with Elvis access are registered. New users may be created and existing users<br />

cancelled. Users may be inserted in or excluded from user groups. User groups define a user<br />

profile with special rights for viewing and changing datapoints and performing special<br />

actions. The visualization designer defines the user groups. Note: changes in user groups<br />

and their authorization rights for Elvis objects are only possible in the Elvis developer module.<br />

6.1.3 Ports (process connections)<br />

Ports may be configured here. In particular the assignment of the ports to the computer<br />

connections and the computer on which the port is started may be specified here.<br />

6.1.4 Message port<br />

The message ports may be configured here.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 27


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 28


7 Diagnosis<br />

7.1 General<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Diagnosis<br />

The visualization diagnosis is generally only necessary if incorrect behaviour is remarked. If<br />

error messages are displayed it is essential that the error text be noted exactly so that the<br />

error may be pinpointed. Please also check your computer’s behaviour via the task manager<br />

(processes and system performance). Elvis module settings may be used for diagnostic<br />

purposes. In most cases to achieve a thorough diagnosis not only information on the error is<br />

required but also the environment. It is therefore useful for diagnosis purposes to select the<br />

maximum scope (all). These settings should be reset for normal operation (maximum at:<br />

errors and warnings) as the diagnosis slows down the program sequence and files created<br />

reach a considerable size. For error diagnoses the information acquired will have to be<br />

forwarded to the project planner for further evaluation in the majority of cases.<br />

7.2 Process server<br />

The process server can create a diagnosis file. The name is elvissvr.log. The file is stored in<br />

the same directory as elvissvr.exe. The scope of the diagnosis may be set in four stages:<br />

Off no diagnosis file is created<br />

Errors only all errors are recorded<br />

Errors and warnings all errors and warnings are recorded (default setting).<br />

All errors, warnings and all other important processes are recorded<br />

The scope of the diagnosis is set via the remote server control. A copy of the diagnosis file<br />

may thus also be created and the diagnosis file deleted<br />

without stopping the process server.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 29


7.3 Terminal<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Terminal<br />

The terminal can create a diagnosis file. The name is elvisrun.log. The file is stored in the<br />

same directory as elvisrun.exe. The scope of the diagnosis may be set in five levels:<br />

Off no diagnosis file is created<br />

Major errors only major errors only are recorded<br />

Errors only all errors are recorded<br />

Errors and warnings all errors and warnings are recorded (default setting).<br />

All errors, warnings and all other important processes are recorded<br />

The scope of the diagnosis is set via the main menu (View > Options... > Diagnosis). The<br />

terminal version information may found under >Help>about... in the main menu. There you<br />

can also display information about the system and all active modules on that PC and save it<br />

as a file.<br />

7.4 Elvis debugger<br />

The Elvis debugger provides a thorough insight into the process image status. The debugger<br />

should only be operated by trained personnel with extensive knowledge of the project and<br />

structure of Elvis objects, in particular the datapoint. To open a project with the debugger<br />

you must log in with the user name and password. The user must have the authorization to<br />

start the debugger. The debugger is started via the remote<br />

server control.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 30


8 Error messages<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Error messages<br />

The most important error messages are listed below together with a description of how the<br />

cause may be eliminated.<br />

8.1 On starting the terminal<br />

Access is denied<br />

Check your user name and password entry. Check whether the computer on which you have<br />

attempted to log in locally is identical to the computer on which the process server is active.<br />

If you are not logging in locally: check the DCOM configuration of the Elvis process server<br />

(see: Configuration for access by network). Error on opening the document A non-existent or<br />

incorrect project file (.iep) may have been specified for the<br />

terminal. The database is not loaded. Your process server module database does not suit the<br />

terminal module project file. Please ensure that the process server has been started with the<br />

correct database file and that you specified the correct project file on starting the terminal<br />

(the file may also be stored in a link). The process server is down or not ready with start up.<br />

8.2 On the process server computer<br />

The database manager symbol is not displayed (instead of „elvis“ the name of your database<br />

is displayed). The connection to the database is interrupted. The active database connection<br />

may be recognized by the program symbol in the task bar.<br />

(1) Close all terminals still active.<br />

(2) Close the process server.<br />

(3) Restart the process server.<br />

(4) Start the terminals<br />

After a process server program crash.<br />

(1) Close all terminals still active.<br />

(2) Open the Windows task manager.<br />

(3) Close process rtdsk50.exe.<br />

(4) Close process Falcon.exe.<br />

(5) Close all processes beginning with „Elvis“ (e.g. ElvisSvr.exe, ElvisRun.exe, etc ).<br />

(6) Restart the process server.<br />

(7) Restart the terminals. Or: shut down and restart the computer.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 31


9 Appendix<br />

9.1 Key assignment<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Appendix<br />

The following keyboard functions are generally available:<br />

Alt+space bar Open system menu.<br />

Alt+F4 Close dialogue field or quit program.<br />

Ctrl+F4 Close the active document window.<br />

Ctrl+Tab/Esc Change to next document window.<br />

Shift+Ctrl+Tab/Esc Change to previous document window.<br />

F1 Call up help system.<br />

Alt oder F10 Activate menu.<br />

Shift+F10 or Menu key Display context menu.<br />

Alt+ Select menu item or control via underlined letters.<br />

Alt+Tab/Esc Change to next application.<br />

Ctrl+Esc Open Windows start menu.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 32


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Installation<br />

1. Installation of the ELVIS runtime software (1)<br />

- Start application from CD: "Setup_Run.exe" in folder and follow<br />

the instructions.<br />

2. Register the IOCOMP control elements (1)<br />

- Copy content of the folder < Laufzeit_Runtime \IoComp_enu> into the ELVIS program<br />

directory (standard path is C:\Programme\Elvis)<br />

- Start the file"reg_iocomp.bat" just copied in your ELVIS program directory and confirm<br />

the registrations.<br />

3. Project data integration (3)<br />

Page 33


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

- Copy the project data from CD: \Projekt_data\EN ("iqhome_en.db", "iqhome_en.iep", "<br />

iqhome.chm") into your ELVIS program directory.<br />

4. Installation of the project planning software (2)<br />

Start application"Setup_SvrConfig.exe" in folder and follow the<br />

instructions.<br />

Now, you can start planning the group addresses, bus connections etc. (Before that, create a<br />

backup of the project data in another folder). Start the >Server Configurator< now. You will<br />

be asked to select the database *.db . Select file "iqhome_en.db" from your ELVIS program<br />

directory. For the first login you will be asked to enter a user name and password. You have<br />

received this data with your confirmation of order and delivery date. The admission data has<br />

administrative rights for full project planning. User name and password can be modified<br />

using the menu >UserProcess serverTerminal< (visualization) must be started. The > Terminal< provides<br />

the connection between the visualization project ("iqhome_en.iep") and the database<br />

("iqhome_en.db"). Start the software >Terminal


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Project software<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic & Professional<br />

Please select submenu...<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 35


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Basic Version<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

Please select submenu...<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 36


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Load project...<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

You must save the original project in a separate folder on your<br />

hard disk or on CD before accessing the project for the first time!<br />

After installation, start "Server Configurator" via programs\Elvis\Server configurator. After<br />

that, load the delivered "iqhome*.db". After successful registration with user<br />

name/password (first registration with ©IQHOME.NET access data given in the<br />

Acknowledgement of order and delivery date confirmation by mail) you can now access the<br />

server of ©IQHOME.NET and execute your putting into operation process.<br />

Page 37


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

In the Basic version fields that cannot be edited are marked grey.<br />

In the menu point "<strong>Data</strong> points" all available communication objects <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> with their<br />

group addresses can be entered under "Address" (approx. 450). Under "request" you can<br />

define when the group address is to be read (run-up = Start Process server, Demand = Start<br />

of visualization page with control elements). Using "Place" you can identify your desired<br />

module with the respective communication objects quickly.<br />

Modules: Description:<br />

AA001-010 Alarm system as burglar alarm system<br />

AB001 Outside lighting control (Matrix)<br />

AL001 Alarm and information message system<br />

EE001 Reminder editor<br />

JA001 4-side blind automatics front 1 (O)<br />

JA002 4-side blind automatics front 2 (S)<br />

JA003 4-side blind automatics front 3 (W)<br />

Page 38


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

JA004 4-side blind automatics front 4 (N)<br />

KL001 Climate Console 01<br />

KL002 Climate Console 02<br />

LI001 Operating Console & Simulation Ch. 01-40<br />

LI002 Operating Console & Simulation Ch. 41-80<br />

MS001 Media Console - Scenario Manager<br />

MS002 Media Console - Audio<br />

SE001 Weather data<br />

SD001 Sensor System Toolbar<br />

TI001 Time Switches (Clocks)<br />

ZA001 Central Command Terminal<br />

ZD001 Definition of Central Commands<br />

System System data (date and time)<br />

Virtual Internal datapoints (output on <strong>EIB</strong> possible)<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 39


<strong>Data</strong> points:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>Data</strong>points<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Group address administration (data points)<br />

Page 40


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

It is possible to assign several group addresses to one communication object. If you preset<br />

the character ">", the second group address instead of the first is read first which might be<br />

useful and important for actuator feedback addresses. If no symbol is given, the first group<br />

address is always read first when "Request" is activated. The group addresses can be given<br />

as 2-fold or 3-fold notations. A mixture must absolutely be avoided!<br />

To plan the data point list use the separate central communication object overview<br />

(PDF) for the individual project modules.<br />

It is possible to enter several group addresses after the other. To separate them use the<br />

semicolon (;). The sum of all characters must not exceed 255. There must be no blank<br />

characters. If several addresses are given after each other, the first address is used to send<br />

(ValueWrite) and request (ValueRead), all addresses are used to receive (ValueWrite,<br />

ValueResponse). We will call this an address string.<br />

Example: 03/5/017;03/5/018;03/5/019<br />

meaning: send to 03/5/017, receive from 03/5/017,...018 und ...019, request from 03/5/017<br />

This behaviour can be changed:<br />

If you omit the first address (the sender), i.e. the address string starts with a semicolon, this<br />

data point will not send.<br />

Example: ;03/5/017 means not sending, receiving and requesting on 03/5/017<br />

If there is a greater-than-symbol (>) before the first address, the first address is only the<br />

sender address. The data point does not respond to telegrams with this address.<br />

Example: >03/5/017;03/5/018;03/5/019 means sending on 03/5/017, receiving on<br />

03/5/018 and 03/5/019, requesting on 03/5/018<br />

Important: Always enter the complete group addresses:<br />

2-fold notation (**/****):<br />

Wright: 08/0062,<br />

Wrong: 8/62<br />

3-fold notation (**/*/***):<br />

Page 41


Right: 08/0/062,<br />

Wrong: 8/0/62<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

C A U T I O N:<br />

When you use a communication object for the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>,, the port "<strong>EIB</strong>" must be selected at<br />

the respective object and at least one group address must be given which must also be<br />

assigned to another <strong>EIB</strong> component in your facility.<br />

If this group address is not used by any other component in your <strong>EIB</strong> facility, the "<strong>EIB</strong>" port<br />

must not be activated since this may lead to malfunctions due to missing values<br />

(ActualValue) within the ©IQHOME.NET calculations.<br />

When filling in your group addresses, m ake sure that the readable (read) group address<br />

(without algebraic sign always the first address) filled in ©IQHOME.NET corresponds to the<br />

readable address in the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> device of your project (as a standard, in ETS also the first<br />

group address given).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 42


<strong>Data</strong>point groups:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>Data</strong>point groups<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

To design the access rights (see user rights), the data points can be matched to a data<br />

point group each. For protection of this data we distinguish between read access (L) and<br />

write access (S). The read or write right for this data can be given to the user groups<br />

individually. If a user is not authorized to access this data they cannot view the respective<br />

data at any place in the runtime modules. With a read right they can view the data but not<br />

change it. The write right permits the user to change the data. An exception are those<br />

records that cannot be modified.<br />

Page 43


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 44


<strong>Data</strong>point ports:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

RS232/USB-Port<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

To ensure communication with the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> via your connected <strong>EIB</strong> RS232 or USB interface,<br />

the "Server" must be set from "Elvis Simulator Port" to "Elvis Eib Port/Falcon" and the<br />

correct COM connection as well as the protocol of your <strong>EIB</strong> RS232 or USB interface must be<br />

selected.<br />

Hints when using a USB data interface with Windows 2000/XP:<br />

If required, disconnect the interface (USB-cable to interface). Start the PC. Connect the<br />

interface (USB-cable to interface). Open the device Manager. Do you find the entries<br />

(marked red in the picture) for the USB interface?<br />

Page 45


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

If you do not find these entries your interface is not detected. Possible causes: faulty plug,<br />

defective able, defective interface, Windows driver surface problem. Try to locate the cause<br />

using another PC / another interface.<br />

If you find the entries, the interface should also appear in the ETS Connection Manager<br />

under communication parameters "USB-device" (The tool ETS Connection Manager is<br />

supplied in the ©IQHOME.NET download area):<br />

Start the enclosed ETS Connection Manager:<br />

Create a new connection (name e.g.: "<strong>KNX</strong>-USB")<br />

Page 46


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Adjustment in ©IQHOME.NET visualization<br />

under "<strong>Data</strong> point connections":<br />

..... ready:<br />

Page 47


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 48


<strong>Data</strong>point requests:<br />

<strong>Data</strong> point requests:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>Data</strong>point Requests<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

The most common and most efficient request method is the one depending on demand.<br />

Here the load on the bus system is the least since only the values needed are really<br />

requested as soon as you open a page or perform a calculation. The request is not executed<br />

when the value is already available in the process image. Each request that is defined in<br />

Elvis is a request „on demand“. In addition to that, the attributes „during run-up“ and<br />

„cyclical“ can be added to the request. Then, Elvis will try to read the value already when the<br />

process server is run up or at a specific time interval. Please consider that this may lead to a<br />

heavy bus load and, in general, is not necessary. Special cases are such devices that, in case<br />

of a value change, cannot send the values or devices that are to be monitored cyclically.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 49


User management:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

User management<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

Using the menu "User", "User Groups" and "User Rights" specific access rights can be<br />

defined in the visualization. Within the visualization the access rights are not ensured by a<br />

password protection of pages but of data points! That is why you will find in the menu " <strong>Data</strong><br />

points" the assignment "Group", i.e. each data point can be put in a data point group.<br />

Depending on whether a registered user (with password to log in at the operating terminal)<br />

has been assigned to this group, this user has the rights defined by you (read, write etc.) for<br />

this data point. However, if no rights have been granted, everything is displayed within the<br />

visualization but changing a push-button or regulator etc. will be of no effect and will not be<br />

executed.<br />

The ELVIS access protection defines the rights to execute specific activities and protects<br />

important data from unauthorized view or modification. In order to generate an efficient and<br />

user friendly administration of rights, the rights are not directly given to the users but to<br />

user groups. One user group is granted specific rights to an object to be protected or to carry<br />

out specific actions. One user can belong to one or more user groups possessing their<br />

respective rights. A similar easy group structure was chosen for the huge number of data<br />

points. Each user group is not granted the right to access individual data points but to access<br />

a data point group. Thus, administration of the rights is clearer and can be modified faster.<br />

The user is important only in connection with the access protection. To grant different<br />

Elvis-users different rights the user names have to be fed into the system and their rights<br />

must be defined. To do so, a user list must be generated and user groups must be formed. If<br />

one user belongs to several user groups, the rights from the different user groups add up. To<br />

prevent misuse of user rights a password can be used in addition to the user name.<br />

Page 50


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 51


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Among the data to be protected are: data points (all attributes), time programmes (the<br />

switching times), records (the values recorded). To protect this data we distinguish between<br />

the read access (L) and the write access (S). The read and write right to this data can be<br />

given individually to the different user groups. If one user has no right to the data, he cannot<br />

view the respective data anywhere in the runtime modules. W ith a read right he can view the<br />

data but cannot modify it. The write right permits the user to modify the data. An exception<br />

are the recordings that cannot be modified.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 52


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 53


Alarm:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Alarm management<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

If data points with alarm monitoring (column "Alarm") have been activated in the data point<br />

list:<br />

these will be managed under "Alarm". The alarm value completes the alarm condition<br />

„Alarm“. It permits to distinguish between excess and shortfall. If the upper limit has been<br />

exceeded the alarm value contains a 1, if there is a value below the lower limit a – 1.<br />

Otherwise (in the „Normal“ condition) the alarm value is 0. During the project planning<br />

period the alarm value is important only for calculations. Limits can be fixed for each data<br />

point. To recognize in the data point list whether limits have been fixed for a data point, the<br />

data point list disposes of a checkbox in the „Alarm“ column. By ticking the alarm checkbox<br />

the data point is included in the list of alarms. By removing the check the respective data<br />

point entry is deleted from the alarm list. Next to the checkbox there is a box to open the<br />

alarm list. An upper and a lower limit can be given for each data point. However, it is not<br />

absolutely necessary to enter both limits.<br />

Principle:<br />

The alarm goes off when the upper limit is exceeded or the lower value is fallen short of. The<br />

limits themselves belong to the admissible range.<br />

The indication of limits for truth values (Boolean) is different from all other formats. Here, we<br />

do not have a value range that could be limited but only two possible values. Thus, the limits<br />

only indicate which of the two values has to release the alarm. In the following we will use<br />

„on“ and „off“ as designation for the two values and thus also represent 1/0, up/down<br />

True/False, -1/0 etc. If the alarm is to be set off at the value „on“, both alarm limits must<br />

be set to „off“. „Off“ is the only admissible value and thus, at the same time, forms the<br />

limits (see above principle). If the alarm is to be released at the value „off“, both alarm<br />

Page 54


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

limits must be set to „on“ (opposite the above case). For truth values it is not useful to set<br />

the alarm limits to different values.<br />

The message groups ("Messages") are defined in the menu >Messages


Message ports:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Message ports<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

Message ports combine all outputs that serve as information about alarm conditions and that<br />

are not given by the operating terminal or data point connections. Possible message types<br />

are for example: print, send e-mail, send SMS, write in a file etc. Project planning of the<br />

different message types is done in the same way. Thus, we achieve a clear and easy to<br />

handle project planning. The most important data required for project planning are given by<br />

answering the following questions:<br />

What will release the message?<br />

What information does the message give?<br />

Who receives the message?<br />

How is the message transmitted?<br />

When is the message transmitted?<br />

To save time during the project planning and to permit quick and easy modifications the data<br />

required for the messages is divided into three lists. Each of these lists includes one part of<br />

the essential data each. Establishing references between the entries in the different lists<br />

permits flexible messages. To illustrate the procedure just consider the list entries and their<br />

references a chain which as a whole contains all information required to send messages.<br />

When planning the messages it is recommended to start with the message ports continues<br />

with the message recipients and the messages and finally, in the alarm list, assigns the<br />

messages to the data points.<br />

Depending on the message type special servers for Elvis messages will be delivered and<br />

installed. Their selection and adjustment is made in the list of the message ports. Message<br />

ports are similar to data point connections. One recipient is assigned to precisely one<br />

message port. Parameters can be used to make individual adaptations. Each port has the<br />

format parameter, it defines the output format.<br />

Format / The format consists of the following elements:<br />

- fixed text<br />

- $(Text) the message text<br />

- $(Time,) that is the UTC<br />

- $(LocalTime,) that is the local time<br />

Example:<br />

Format=Elvis-Message $(LocalTime,DD.MM.YY hh:mm:ss) $(Text)<br />

Due to the information $(Text) the text stored in the "Text" field under "<strong>Data</strong> points" at the<br />

Page 56


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

communication objects "Alarm message 01..." is sent as SMS when the alarm is set off.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 57


Message recipients:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Message recipients<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

The list of recipients defines who can be reached how. Here, you can define the address or<br />

number of the recipient (who) as well as the transmission type by selecting a message port (<br />

how). A message delay time and a cyclical message repetition can also be put into the list<br />

of recipients.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 58


Messages:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Messages<br />

Project planning<br />

Basic<br />

The list of messages defines what message is sent to whom and through which. Activation<br />

(through which) can be an excess or shortfall of the limits but also its acknowledgement<br />

and the return to the normal range. The same applies to the deactivation. However,<br />

deactivation only plays a role if a delayed or cyclical message is demanded. Then, a<br />

deactivation terminates the messages or message trials. The message text (what) consists<br />

of fixed and variable parts. Variable parts are the data point attributes of the data point that<br />

has set off the alarm (see 6.2.2 and 32.4.2). They are just inserted as place holders into the<br />

fixed text parts. Place holders are:<br />

$(Name), $(Type), $(TechnicalAddress), $(Text), $(ActualValue), $(NominalValue) or<br />

$(Value(Location)). Even defined attributes can be accessed via $(Value(Name of the<br />

attribute)). The recipient/s (to whom) must be put into the list of recipients. Several<br />

recipients can be assigned to one message. In addition to that, a data point in a message<br />

can control whether the message is sent (columns „Control-<strong>Data</strong> point“ and „Control-Value“).<br />

Extended configuration of the alarm console for SMS: see description of alarm and<br />

information message console!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 59


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Professional Version<br />

Project planning<br />

Professional<br />

The ELVIS project software (Professional) must be ordered directly from IT <strong>GmbH</strong><br />

(www.it-gmbh.de). This is due to licence rights. Purchase of a project software full licence<br />

must be proven (send invoice no. of IT <strong>GmbH</strong> by mail). Only then you will receive the release<br />

key for the complete project of ©IQHOME.NET.<br />

Because of its complex structure we will not describe project planning in this help.<br />

Please refer to the separate and very comprehensive technical ELVIS manual!<br />

Do not forget to save the original project in a separate folder on your hard disk or<br />

on CD before you access the project for the first time!<br />

Never change the data point names "Name" of the communication objects<br />

since this will lead to faulty script processing and calculations!<br />

Examples from the Elvis project planning:<br />

Page 60


Excerpt of "<strong>Data</strong> point connections"<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

(01) Menu adapt data point connections<br />

(02)(03) Adapt parameters (COM Port, BCU Protocol [BCU1, FT1.2] etc.)<br />

Page 61


Excerpt of "<strong>Data</strong> points"<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

(04) Menu data points<br />

(05) <strong>Data</strong> point name<br />

(06) Select data point type (EIS communication objects <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>)<br />

(07) Select data point connection<br />

(08) Assign group address to data point (double or triple notation possible)<br />

(09) Adapt data point request (when server runs up, on demand [page call], cyclical etc.)<br />

(10) <strong>Data</strong> point description/information or message texts (e.g. SMS)<br />

(11) Assign data point to a user group<br />

Page 62


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Excerpt of "Operating terminal", here visualization interface (only possible for<br />

project version of ©IQHOME.NET Professional)<br />

(12) Menu operating terminal<br />

(13) Attribute window of control element (18)<br />

(14) Individual text display on the button if value changes<br />

(15) Individual colour for text display and background<br />

(16) Integration of any picture/symbol<br />

(17) Currently integrated picture<br />

(18) Currently processed control element<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 63


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Support<br />

Support Service<br />

When purchasing the product without support you will receive access to our ©IQHOME.NET<br />

service area. The difference between this version and the version with support is that you<br />

cannot send questions to us but may only view given information. After finishing the<br />

purchase process each customer receives the link for software download by mail as well as<br />

the access data for the service area.<br />

The download link is free for a limited time. The method of payment determines when you<br />

will receive the respective mail after purchase. For direct debiting or credit card payment you<br />

will receive the download link immediately after purchase. For cash in advance the link is<br />

released as soon as we have received payment.<br />

If you have decided to buy the version with support we will answer your individual<br />

questions concerning installation and project problems by mail. You will receive a special<br />

mail address showing your order number. We will do our best to answer your questions as<br />

soon as possible, however, we are not obliged to answer your questions or solve your<br />

problem within a certain time. Support is limited to one year.<br />

After we have received your order, the licence dongle (USB or Parallel for NT) will be sent to<br />

you by mail within a few days together with the licence certificate/s. Till that time the<br />

process server is limited to a runtime of 2 hours per start.<br />

In general, your questions will be answered on the same day from Monday to Friday between<br />

8 a.m. and 5 p.m. Our technical support may even be contacted at weekends and on public<br />

holidays depending on availability. The content of your questions and the solution will be<br />

made available to all registered customers in the service area but we will not include names,<br />

e-mail addresses or other personal data.<br />

The ©IQHOME.NET service area is not a platform but a list of questions, problems and<br />

solutions listed according to topics and selected by <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>.<br />

©IQHOME.NET is constantly being optimised and extended. However, there is no claim to a<br />

specific update. Basically, updates are free and not limited in time for buyers of<br />

©IQHOME.NET. Even years later, a buyer of ©IQHOME.NET, with or without support, can<br />

download available updates free of charge. Precondition is that a buyer returns the signed<br />

licence certificate/s. For a global version change a fee might possibly be charged.<br />

Many modules such as counter administration, timetable module, energy optimisation etc.<br />

can be purchased as options and extensions. Later extensions are also always possible. (see<br />

version "Individual").<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 64


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Navigation<br />

Main menu<br />

(01)(02)(03)(04)(05)(06)<br />

Base menu<br />

(07)(08)(09)<br />

Submenu<br />

(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)(15)<br />

The main menu consists of links to the modules: 4-side blind automatics (01), Outside<br />

lighting matrix (02), Media Console (03), Climate Console (04), Tools (05), Operating<br />

terminal light (06).<br />

The base menu contains the integrated online help (07), the link to the start page (08) and<br />

the page-related label editor (09).<br />

In the submenu, all available program modules of a selected main menu are displayed for<br />

selection. An active element is marked by a small LED flashing white at the lower edge of the<br />

button. Our example shows the main menu "Tools" (05). "Central commands" (10) is being<br />

activated in the submenu. As examples, you will find further available program modules of<br />

"Tools" in this submenu: Definition of central commands (11), Alarm and information<br />

message console (12), Weather station sensor system (13), Memory editor (14), Clocks<br />

(15), Alarm system (17).<br />

It is possible that each submenu is divided into its own program modules such as weather<br />

station sensor system\sensor system toolbar. Using the arrow keys you can browse through<br />

the submenu (continue, back). A free navigation field (16) can be used for further links<br />

(©IQHOME.NET Professional project planning).<br />

Page 65


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 66


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Start screen<br />

Start page<br />

(01) Display of the current PC system time, date and day<br />

(02) Display of the current wind speed in m/s and standard steps<br />

(03) Display of the current rain situation<br />

(04) Display of currently active alarms from the alarm console<br />

(05) Display of the current outside temperature with frost warning<br />

(06) Display of the current twilight situation<br />

(07) ©IQHOME.NET Link (www.eibmarkt.de)<br />

(08) Individual module labelling, two-line, using the label editor<br />

(09) Label editor<br />

(10) Online help<br />

(11) Main menu 4-side blind automatics<br />

(12) Main menu outside lighting matrix<br />

(13) Main menu media console (Scenario Manager & Audio Console)<br />

(14) Main menu climate console<br />

(15) Main menu tools (Central Terminal & Definition, Alarm system, Alarm and information<br />

message console, Memory editor, Clock program, Sensor system)<br />

(16) Main menu operating console with presence simulation<br />

(17) Runtime menu<br />

Page 67


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

chirm gliedert sich in mehrere Bereiche. Im Ken befindet sich das<br />

Informationsdisplay mit folgenden Daten:<br />

Time and date (01) are sent cyclically (EIS3 and EIS4 format cyclical 1 min.) to the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

bus and, thus can be used for the most different applications and synchronization tasks<br />

within your facility (e.g. as master clock, display for room controller or temperature<br />

regulator, timer clock for alarm systems etc.). The display of the current PC system time,<br />

date and day is always active and is always on.<br />

INFO: Integration of a USB DCF PC radio-controlled clock (good value at the shops) into<br />

your PC, permit automatic switch-over to summer and winter daylight saving time as well as<br />

a 100% precision. When purchasing the clock outside Germany pay attention to the<br />

reception of the DCF radio signal in your region. The data points are given cyclically as type<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> Date (3 Byte), EIS 4, (data point "Datum extern", see project planning in<br />

©IQHOME.NET) and as type <strong>EIB</strong> Time (3 Byte), EIS 3, (data point "Uhrzeit extern", see<br />

project planning in ©IQHOME.NET) to the <strong>EIB</strong>. If required, the cycle time can be modified in<br />

the project.<br />

In (02) the current wind speed in m/s (in weather station area – sensor system also in km/h<br />

and wind speed), as well as the exact designation of the weather service are displayed as<br />

text. Below the text there is an analogue value display of the current wind speed in m/s. You<br />

will find all sensor inputs that can be connected in the data point list <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> or under the<br />

topic Weather station sensor system.<br />

The following values are calculated automatically by ©IQHOME.NET from the data of the<br />

Page 68


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> wind sensor (if available) and displayed as text:<br />

> 118 km/h = "Hurricane"<br />

> 103 km/h = "Violent storm"<br />

> 089 km/h = "Heavy storm"<br />

> 075 km/h = "Storm"<br />

> 062 km/h = "Stormy wind"<br />

> 050 km/h = "Stiff breeze"<br />

> 039 km/h = "Strong wind"<br />

> 029 km/h = "Fresh breeze"<br />

> 020 km/h = "Moderate breeze"<br />

> 012 km/h = "Weak breeze"<br />

> 006 km/h = "Light breeze"<br />

> 001 km/h = "Light draught"<br />

= 000 km/h = "Calm"<br />

Both displays are only active if your facility contains an <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> wind sensor and values are<br />

sent to the bus. Here it is not important whether the data is given in m/s or km/h. As a<br />

standard ©IQHOME.NET is set to m/s. However, with the sensor system toolbar you can<br />

select your own units using conversion factors (Offset/Factor). ©IQHOME.NET offers this<br />

option for all integrated sensor inputs in the sensor system toolbar. The <strong>EIB</strong> communication<br />

object must be of type <strong>EIB</strong> Wert-16 (2 Byte), EIS 5 (Float), (data point "Sensor Wind",<br />

see project planning in ©IQHOME.NET) and is generally supported by all weather stations.<br />

If no data is received, these elements are completely blank.<br />

This position (03) indicates the current rain situation. The display (symbol clouds with rain)<br />

is only on if your facility disposes of a <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> rain sensor and the value logical "1" of the<br />

type <strong>EIB</strong> Schalter (1 Bit) Boolean, EIS 1, (data point "Sensor Regen", see project<br />

planning in ©IQHOME.NET) is active on the bus.<br />

If no data is received, these elements are completely blank.<br />

The text "Alarm!" (flashing) is indicated in this position (04), if one of the 13 alarm<br />

messages from the alarm console has been released (value logical "1" of type <strong>EIB</strong> Schalter<br />

(1 Bit) Boolean, EIS 1, (data "Alarmmeldung 01-13", see project planning in<br />

©IQHOME.NET)). Above the text message, the current number (not flashing) of incoming<br />

and not yet acknowledged alarm messages is indicated. By clicking on the number or the<br />

text you go directly to the alarm console to view all active alarms. If no alarm message has<br />

been released, the displays are automatically blinded out.<br />

The current temperature is given in °C (05). The display is only active, if your facility<br />

disposes of a <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> temperature sensor and values are sent to the bus. The symbol "Star"<br />

is automatically (flashing) displayed when the current temperature value is smaller<br />

than/equal 3°C and there is a danger of frost. These calculations are made automatically in<br />

©IQHOME.NET and can be modified using the project software if required. The <strong>EIB</strong><br />

communication object must be of type <strong>EIB</strong> Wert-16 (2 Byte), EIS 5 (Float), (data point "<br />

Sensor AT", see project planning in ©IQHOME.NET) and is generally supported by all<br />

weather stations.<br />

This position (06) gives the current twilight situation. The display is only active, if your<br />

facility disposes of a <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> twilight sensor and values are sent to the bus. The symbol<br />

(cloud with crescent moon and active outside lamp at the house) is only displayed when<br />

twilight is active. The twilight value can be evaluated in ©IQHOME.NET in 2 ways:<br />

The <strong>EIB</strong> communication object can be of type <strong>EIB</strong> Wert-16 (2 Byte), EIS 5 (Float), (data<br />

point "Sensor HellD", see project planning in ©IQHOME.NET) and is generally supported by<br />

all weather stations. Here, the twilight limit value is parameterised in ©IQHOME.NET by<br />

means of a slide switch (in outside lighting matrix).<br />

Page 69


or<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The <strong>EIB</strong> communication object can also be of type <strong>EIB</strong> Schalter (1 Bit) Boolean, EIS 1,<br />

whereas limit value parameterisation is not done via ©IQHOME.NET (outside lighting<br />

matrix), but directly by the <strong>EIB</strong> twilight switch or a conventional twilight switch that has<br />

been connected by means of a binary <strong>EIB</strong> input. In this case, the display is on when a<br />

telegram value logical "1" of type <strong>EIB</strong> Schalter (1 Bit) Boolean, EIS 1 on the<br />

communication object "Sensor HellDS" (see project planning in ©IQHOME.NET) is sent.<br />

The main navigation menu is grouped around the core (information display):<br />

Link to the www.eibmarkt.de website (07) to get news directly from the service area. To do<br />

so, a connection must be established. If there is no connection this link is without any<br />

importance.<br />

Your project designation (08) is displayed in two separate text elements that can be edited.<br />

Using the label editor (09) this label can be edited directly during the runtime. You will find<br />

the label editor (09) on every ©IQHOME.NET page to edit all available labels for the<br />

currently active page quickly and flexibly during the runtime. Click on this element to<br />

activate it and you will come to a copy of the current page. Here, all text elements that can<br />

be edited are marked "yellow". Click directly on a yellow text element to modify the text.<br />

After the modification you use an "arrow key" to return to the original page and the new<br />

labels will appear.<br />

You will find the online help (10) on every ©IQHOME.NET page to access required<br />

information quickly. The main navigation (11)(12)(13)(14)(15)(16) navigates you<br />

directly to the topics.<br />

In the runtime menu (17) you can also open all pages using the "Open page" symbol.<br />

Further options are "Back to the last active page", "Update", "Full screen mode", "Basic<br />

adjustments for alarm list", "Print function" and the Elvis help.<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual communication objects <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 70


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 71


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

The burglar alarm system (EMA) serves as active building protection. The EMA does not<br />

dispose of a VdS certification but serves as alarm centre for simple requirements in<br />

one-family houses and apartment houses with high-quality equipment. The EMA disposes of<br />

3 activation areas (EMA for absence). In addition, each area is equipped with monitoring<br />

during presence (night) and separate activation option. Thus, it is possible to use the system<br />

during presence with other characteristics than those for absence without a new<br />

configuration. Area 1 (EMA) for example serves to monitor the ground floor and upper floor<br />

of your house. When you are absent you might want to activate all message lines (window<br />

contacts, door contacts, glass break detector, motion detector etc.). However, during night<br />

operation, certain motion detectors should not be integrated in the monitoring (hall in front<br />

of the bedroom) or window contacts (bedroom window) but only the whole ground floor and<br />

certain areas on the upper floor. This is achieved with the night system area 1 (night). In<br />

each area (EMA/night) the connected message lines can be activated or deactivated<br />

individually. The night system for example can be activated by means of a push-button near<br />

the bed (bedroom, children’s room, guest room) (see function description). There is a<br />

multitude of combination options via matrix with always one matrix for a maximum of 15<br />

motion detector inputs, one matrix for max. 22 window, door and other closing messages,<br />

one matrix to assign the alarm outputs and one matrix to define a reference contact, which<br />

represents for example the exit of an alarm area. The reference contact serves to exclude the<br />

collect information message "Activation possible ", which is made available externally and<br />

separately for each area on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> to be integrated in a push-button switch (LED) or a<br />

panel near the respective activation device (within the building). Many other functions such<br />

as countdown to activation or alarm delay for alarm outputs (siren, switch-off delay) are<br />

integrated.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 72


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Alarm system as burglar alarm system (EMA):<br />

� Burglar alarm system with three activation areas (EMA)<br />

� Each area with additional monitoring while present (night) and separate activation option<br />

� 37 message inputs (lines) 22 of which are message inputs for window and door contacts<br />

as well as 15 motion detector inputs<br />

� General alarm outputs (siren, flashlight, sound etc.)<br />

� Area-related alarm outputs (alarm, SMS etc.)<br />

� Matrix for free message input assignment for areas 1-3, EMA (E)/night (N)<br />

� Cycle monitoring of the message inputs (can be switched on individually) with freely<br />

definable time intervals and status information<br />

� 6 separate activation inputs to activate the areas 1-3 EMA (E)/night (N)<br />

� Countdown function for activation delay of the areas 1-3 EMA (E)/night (N)<br />

� Operating mode switch-over for motion detector (lighting- ,message mode)<br />

� Status display for activation stand-by, LED activation/deactivation message and<br />

operating mode<br />

� Matrix for alarm output assignment for the areas 1-3 EMA (E)/night (N)<br />

� Matrix for system functions of the areas 1-3 (panic, alarm output delays, SMS etc.)<br />

� Extended panic function with logics for outside lighting matrix and optional twilight<br />

switch-off function<br />

� Released detector display / contacts after alarm and registration in alarm list with time<br />

and date stamp<br />

� Quit function for released detectors and reset of the alarm outputs<br />

� Safety thanks to logic scripts in server, operating terminal does not have to be activated<br />

� Remote access administrative or data point related<br />

� Message function by means of SMS can be configured freely (3 SMS alarm outputs area<br />

1-3)<br />

� User-defined access rights<br />

� User-defined labelling of the alarm outputs, message inputs and modules<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 73


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

To make use of this module the following is required or recommended:<br />

� To transmit SMS information the modem recommended under www.eibmarkt.com must<br />

be used (Microlink 56k Fun USB).<br />

� Pre-configurated for D1/D2/EPlus (GSM/UMTS) networks, other networks can be<br />

integrated in a "Services" file that is also delivered.<br />

Note:<br />

Basically, it might be necessary to adapt your operating system & modem to ensure SMS.<br />

We cannot grant any support for these specifications.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

V.92-Internet-Modem with USB<br />

Ref. No.: N490020<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: Microlink<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 56k Fun USB<br />

IQHOME.NET is equipped with an alarm and information message console which has already<br />

been pre-configurated for the SMS dispatch of 13 single alarm messages and 1 collective<br />

error message with services for the GSM/UMTS D1/D2 and E-PLUS networks. Other networks<br />

can also be integrated but have not been tested. Due to the complex activations and the fact<br />

that the parameters do not have a uniform standard for all modem types, the comprehensive<br />

tests have been run for one modem type which can thus be recommended here: Microlink<br />

56k Fun USB (analog).<br />

Extract from the alarm and information message console IQHOME<br />

Page 74


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Activation device EMA (outside)<br />

concealed or surface mounted<br />

Art.Nr.: N157941<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: GIRA<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 0135 00<br />

Switch keys/VdS radio-controlled alarm system/VdS concealed shaped semi-cylinder not<br />

included in delivery! To activate or deactivate alarm centres. Wire-connected. Sealed casing<br />

to be used inside or outside, selectable continuous or pulse contact, two freely switchable<br />

LED displays and buzzer to indicate acknowledgement or rejection, arcing and lift-off contact<br />

against sabotage. The casings disposes of a protection against front drilling. For installation<br />

acc. to VdS, a VdS shaped semi-cylinder is required (not included in delivery!). Operating<br />

voltage: 9 to 15 V DC Nominal voltage: 12 V DC, current consumption per LED: approx. 10<br />

mA, buzzer current consumption: approx. 25 mA signal transmitter: buzzer 12 V 85 dB/10<br />

cm load capacity of all contacts: max. 60 V / 0,5 A operating temperature: - 20 C to + 60 C<br />

protection: IP 54 surface-mounted casing, front plate: Aluminium die casting, colour: white<br />

RAL 9010, dimensions casing: W x H x D 79 x 113 x 54 mm VdS-certificate: G 197 707,<br />

concealed casing, front plate: Aluminium precision casting, dimensions front plate: W x H x<br />

D 101 x 135 x 3 mm, dimensions casing: W x H x D 79 x 113 x 54 mm, VdS-certificate: G<br />

197 707 Reference no. 0135 00 concealed<br />

4-channel push button interface<br />

for<br />

activation device EMA (inside assembly)<br />

Ref. No.: N370360<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: GIRA<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 1119 00<br />

Page 75


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The 4-channel push button interface has 4 independent channels which – depending on<br />

parameterization – can be used as inputs or alternatively as outputs (only channels 1 or 2).<br />

The push button interface can therefore be used to poll its inputs for the switching state of<br />

up to 4 potential-free push buttons/switches with a common reference potential and send<br />

the corresponding telegrams to the instabus. These may be telegrams for switching or<br />

dimming, shutter/blind control or value transmitter applications (dimming value transmitter,<br />

light-scene extension, temperature or brightness value transmitter). Moreover, 2 switching<br />

event counters or 2 pulse counters are available. Channels 1 and 2 can be used alternatively<br />

as independent outputs for controlling up to two LEDs. To increase the output current (cf.<br />

Technical <strong>Data</strong>), the channels can also be connected in parallel if they are parameterized<br />

alike. The outputs are short-circuit-proof and protected against overloading and false<br />

polarity. Connecting 230 V signals or other external voltages to the inputs is not permitted.<br />

The available inputs and outputs are connected as follows:<br />

Signalgeberkombination<br />

Blitzlicht/Sirene<br />

Ref. No.: N157980<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: GIRA<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 0956 00<br />

Outside siren with flashlight/VdS radio alarm system/VdS white, acoustic/optical signal<br />

transmitter unit for inside or outside. To be connected directly to the radio alarm centre/VdS<br />

or the radio sub-centre. With sabotage contact, i.e. an alarm signal is given when the casing<br />

is opened. The casing consists of corrosion resistant stainless steel V2A, is powder-varnished<br />

Page 76


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

and very robust. The edges of the casing are welded and thus it cannot be bent open or<br />

opened with a lever. Weather resistant siren: voltage supply: 12 V DC (9 to 13,8) current<br />

consumption: 500 mA bei 12 V DC sound pressure: 124 dB flashlight: voltage supply: 12 V<br />

DC current consumption: 300 mA at 12 V DC flashlight: approx. 1 W s temperature range: -<br />

20 C to + 70 C dimensions: W x H x D 185 x 380 x 140 mm Protection: IP 64<br />

VdS-certificate: G 195 093 (with flashlight), G 195 094 (w/out flashlight) reference no. 0956<br />

00 white<br />

Topology example:<br />

Alarm movement detector<br />

Universal-Comfort<br />

Ref. No.: N167568<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: JUNG<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 3180-1A<br />

Page 77


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The automatic switch 180° Universal with alarm message is designed for interior application<br />

and is plugged onto a concealed bus coupler (UP-BA). It works with a passive infrared sensor<br />

(PIR) and responds to heat movement released by people, animals or objects and sends<br />

telegrams to the instabus <strong>EIB</strong> depending on the operating mode adjusted. Possible operating<br />

modes are a lighting operation and a more 'insensitive' message operation. In lighting<br />

operation the automatic switch can transmit switch, value indicator or light scene call<br />

telegrams to the bus. In message operation, the automatic switch transmits a message<br />

telegram to a terminal such as the alarm centre only after a repeated request of the motion<br />

signal. The automatic switch Universal can be used as single instrument, main instrument or<br />

extension station. Thus, the use of several automatic switches Universal in one room – to<br />

extend the capture range – is possible when you combine one device that has been<br />

parameterised as main instrument with several devices parameterised as extension stations.<br />

Here, the automatic switch Universal can be connected with automatic switches Standard<br />

concealed with extension station application or with presence detectors Universal as<br />

extension station. Using a slide switch the automatic switch Universal can be operated<br />

manually. Furthermore, the device can be adapted to the local conditions by means of three<br />

potentiometers. The device disposes of an alarm function in case of its removal from the bus<br />

coupler. Comprehensive separate parameters for alarm system operation (message<br />

operation) permit a detailed fine adjustment of the detector sensitivity. Thus, false alarms<br />

are reduced considerably.<br />

Application<br />

Lock Bolt Switching Contact<br />

(for monitoring locks on doors and windows)<br />

Ref. No.: a290103<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: ABB<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: WRK/W<br />

The lock bolt switching contact is used for monitoring locks on doors and windows.<br />

Function<br />

The switching element of the lock bolt switching contact is a micro-switch with a two-way<br />

contact. The switching point can be adjusted with a three-way latching disc. The device is<br />

supplied in switch position 2 (notch of the latching disc in the centre of the operating lever).<br />

For switch position 1 or 3, lift the latching disc and snap into place after turning it to the<br />

required switch position according to the markings. In addition, the operating lever can be<br />

extended by 6 or 12 mm by attaching the supplied plastic clip.<br />

Design and installation<br />

Page 78


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Due to its compact design, the lock bolt switching contact can simply be mounted behind any<br />

strike plate. The printed circuit board that is attached to the micro-switch enables the<br />

connection cables to be soldered on and offers additional soldering terminals for any required<br />

resistors. The lock bolt switching contact is mounted inside the strike plate of the door or<br />

window frame using 3 countersunk screws. The opening may need to be enlarged under<br />

certain conditions.<br />

Magnetic contact MK4W VdS<br />

(for monitoring doors and windows)<br />

Ref. No.: e166-3<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: MK4W<br />

Magnetic contact and magnet to be installed in window and door frames to monitor opening.<br />

Magnetic contact and magnet are installed facing each other or in parallel in the window<br />

frame/door panel and window base/door base. Series connection of magnetic contacts in the<br />

reporting line possible. Type of contact: 1-pole closing contact, switching voltage: max. DC<br />

100 V Capacity: max. 10 W Operating voltage: max. 40 V Connecting cable white: 2,5<br />

m/10m LIYY 4 x 0,14 qmm, VdS-No.: G 191 556 Color: white, Delivery volume: magnetic<br />

contact, magnet, Option: 2 pcs. casings, white (AGW ) Info: In order to analyze the contact<br />

information in the <strong>EIB</strong> the magnetic contact has to "be prepared" for bus use first. This can<br />

be done in different ways. For example, if you want to connect the contact locally to the <strong>EIB</strong>,<br />

that means you do not want to put the line directly to a central evaluation center (such as<br />

electrical distribution) the best way is a connection using a push button interface (2-fold,<br />

4-fold, 8-fold). For central registration the binary inputs REG (series buit-in device for<br />

electrical distribution) are suited best. In general, these are 24 V-AC/DC binary inputs, that<br />

means a voltage (24V) is sent to the contact which is then analysed at the binary input<br />

(edge analysis). For example: leading edge (window closed) there are 24 V at the binary<br />

input ---> "OFF" bus telegram and decreasing edge (window open) there aren´t 24 V at the<br />

binary input ---> "ON" bus telegram. You can use this information to regulate the heating<br />

when the window is open to ensure frost protection or alert and display messages. In<br />

general, these contacts are registered room by room that means one binary input contact per<br />

room.<br />

Various further sensors are available in the shop for integration (ex. broken glass or<br />

ultrasound sensors etc.).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 79


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Topology<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

Inputs <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Outputs<br />

Page 80


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 81


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Central terminal<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

The surface of the alarm system (EMA) consists of several operating pages (ModuleAA001 -<br />

Module AA008):<br />

The main module is the alarm system information display (AID), Module AA001:<br />

(01) Information display alarm system area 1<br />

(02) Operating console alarm system area 1<br />

(03) Information display alarm system area 2<br />

(04) Operating console alarm system area 2<br />

(05) Information display alarm system area 3<br />

(06) Operating console alarm system area 3<br />

(07) Standby display for area 1-3 each and divided into EMA as well as night operation<br />

(08) Activation button alarm system (EMA)<br />

(09) Input mask for switch-on delay (countdown) till activation EMA with remaining time<br />

display<br />

(10) Activation button alarm system (night)<br />

(11) Input mask for switch-on delay (countdown) till activation night with remaining time<br />

display<br />

(12) Acknowledgement button after alarm (reset of message lines and alarm outputs)<br />

(13) Individual labelling of the alarm system areas by means of the label editor<br />

(14) Navigation link main menu (button pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if<br />

selected, our example "Tools")<br />

(15) Navigation link submenu Tools<br />

(button pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "Alarm<br />

system")<br />

(16) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

(17) Navigation link to system settings of the alarm system<br />

(18) Navigation link to message line matrix with the lock monitoring contacts 01-10<br />

(windows/doors)<br />

(19) Navigation link to message line matrix with the lock monitoring contacts 11-20<br />

(windows/doors)<br />

(20) Navigation link to message line matrix with the lock monitoring contacts 21-22<br />

(windows/doors)<br />

(21) Navigation link to message line matrix with the motion detector inputs 01-10<br />

(22) Navigation link to message line matrix with the motion detector inputs 11-15<br />

(23) Navigation link back to main menu "Tools"<br />

Page 82


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Each alarm system area can be used as EMA-system when absent or night alarm system<br />

when present. Each of the 3 alarm areas in IQHOME.NET disposes of a alarm system<br />

information display.<br />

The individual alarm system information displays 1-3 show the current condition of the<br />

subordinate system areas EMA/night. The upper section displays the EMA area (Einbruch<br />

(burglar) Melde (alarm) Anlage (system)). The function block EMA is only activated in case<br />

of absence. The lower section shows the condition of the alarm system area night.<br />

Page 83


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Furthermore, there are 3 general symbols for released alarm outputs in the display:<br />

1. Acoustic alarm output set off (siren, symbol in the top left middle, bell)<br />

2. Optical alarm output set off (flashlight/rotating flashlight, symbol in the bottom left<br />

middle, rotating flashlight)<br />

3. Area-related alarm output set off (symbol in the top right middle, globe with mail)<br />

All information is stored in the alarm list including time and date of release:<br />

Basically, only the EMA-system for absence or the night alarm system for presence can be<br />

active. That is why only one lock symbol (symbol door with lock) stands for the EMA and<br />

night area. This symbol shows the status of the alarm system being active. The symbol<br />

appears when the system is activated. This information is important for access via a<br />

Terminal Client Server in case of absence.<br />

For the area EMA and night the following separate status displays are generated:<br />

4. Activation possible ....<br />

5. Activation impossible!<br />

6. Activation failed!<br />

7. Countdown running ....<br />

8. Alarm system is active!<br />

9. Burglar alarm!<br />

10. Deactivation after alarm<br />

With an EMA-area below and a night area above this display the first message line that sets<br />

off the alarm is displayed. With every additional released message line this display will be<br />

updated according to the endangered area, if required. (remote monitoring/access). These<br />

and all other released message lines are stored in the alarm list indicating date and time and<br />

can be analysed or printed.<br />

You can view all available <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list.<br />

The visualization terminal of the alarm system mainly serves the investigation when alarms<br />

are set off and the system has to be adapted. Generally, the alarm system areas 1-3 are<br />

activated by means of an external activation device for EMA operation and by means of a<br />

night switch (<strong>EIB</strong> key) for night operation. All necessary <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects are<br />

provided in IQHOME.NET. Of course, you can also activate the alarm areas directly by means<br />

Page 84


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

of a touch screen monitor near the exit when you leave the building. However, despite of the<br />

specifically defined user rights/access data for the visualization, the PC/communication<br />

server and the touch screen monitor should be installed in a monitored area.<br />

A direct activation is executed by means of the respective buttons. "E" represents the EMA<br />

system and "N" the night operation of the specific area. When you click on the field for<br />

switch-on delay input (countdown) you can enter an individual delay time in seconds for the<br />

respective system (EMA/night). The max. delay time amounts to 32767 seconds (approx. 9<br />

hours). If you enter bigger values, the system works only with the given maximum value of<br />

32767.<br />

The activation devices EMA/night are blocked against each other e.g. if one area is open<br />

activation of the other is not possible.<br />

Button symbols:<br />

E/U - EMA system not activated<br />

E/S - EMA system activated<br />

N/U - night system not activated<br />

N/S – night system activated<br />

Integration of the external <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> activation device for EMA operation (when absent) is<br />

done according to the following topology example:<br />

Page 85


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

(LED colours may vary depending on the manufacturer of the activation device. In IQHOME.NET we use yellow and<br />

green.)<br />

The required communication objects to be entered in a universal interface 4-fold are<br />

provided separately in IQHOME.NET for all 3 areas:<br />

11. LED triggering, activation device, area 1, 2 or 3 EMA<br />

SSB1LEDge (communication object name in IQHOME.NET, for example for area 1 EMA)<br />

- This LED is switched on for a few seconds only after activation by means of switch key<br />

(activation countdown) and indicates the successful countdown start to activate the<br />

alarm system in the respective area. If this LED is not switched on after key switch<br />

activation, the system is not ready for activation that means at least one of the message<br />

lines you defined is not ready (door or window open etc.). To avoid such a situation we<br />

have created a separate communication object SSB1EMAbereit. Using a group address<br />

you can connect this object with a push button switch near the exit (LED display). Thus,<br />

you will be informed before activation whether an activation is possible or not. In addition<br />

to that, it is possible to exclude information inputs you defined at this communication<br />

object using the reference contact matrix (see further function description of modules<br />

AA008, AA009 und AA010) (exclusion in display only, not in monitoring), e.g. the exit<br />

door to avoid that the push button near the door permanently shows the information<br />

"Activation impossible".<br />

12. LED triggering, activation area 1, 2 or 3 EMA<br />

SSB1LEDgn (communication object name in IQHOME.NET, for example for area 1 EMA)<br />

- This LED is switched on for a few seconds after the countdown has been completed and<br />

indicates the successful activation of the alarm system in the respective area.<br />

The LEDs are switched on for 3 seconds only and then switched off to avoid that third<br />

parties, or potential burglars, view your current alarm system condition.<br />

When deactivated, a short flash of the green LED SSB1LEDgn indicates the successful<br />

deactivation of the alarm area and you can enter the building area that is not monitored<br />

now.<br />

13. Activation/deactivation (A/D) is carried out using the communication object SSB1EMA<br />

(communication object name in IQHOME.NET, for example for area 1 EMA). The<br />

communication object is of type 1Bit. A "1" signal activates the system. A "0" signal<br />

deactivates an active system. If, after a burglar alarm, the system is deactivated<br />

(deactivation after alarm), you can acknowledge this area (same function as<br />

Page 86


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

acknowledgement key in visualization "Ackn.") using the switch key and sending a new<br />

"0" signal. Thus, all alarm outputs (siren, flashlight etc.) and message lines (active<br />

displays of released message lines, motion detectors etc.) are reset. After<br />

acknowledgement, the released message lines are shown in the alarm list.<br />

Info: In our example with 4 channels of a universal interface activation/deactivation is<br />

possible with only one input (UM-Function). However, all dispose of a parameter to detect<br />

a long pulse for instance to generate a "0" signal for the extended acknowledgement<br />

function. As an alternative, activation/deactivation (active/not active) can also be<br />

realized with two input channels (one input only "1" [On] signal, the other only "0" [Off]<br />

signal).<br />

The sabotage contact of the activation device is connected with one of the 22 available<br />

message inputs for lock monitoring contacts (Infomeldung 01 to Infomeldung 22)<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 87


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Alarm outputs<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

(17) Navigation link to the system settings module AA007 of the alarm system:<br />

(24) Selection of the alarm outputs in ©IQHOME.NET that can be activated<br />

(25) General, area-related alarm outputs (for free application)<br />

(26) General alarm outputs (flashlight/siren)<br />

(27) General alarm output sound<br />

(28) General alarm output panic light<br />

(29) Area assignment for areas 1-3 (EMA [E] and night [N])<br />

(30) Selection matrix to assign the alarm outputs to the areas<br />

(31) Input mask switch-off delay in seconds for alarm output siren with remaining time<br />

display<br />

(32) Status display of alarm outputs with direct activation option<br />

(33) Navigation link back to main module alarm system information display (AID), module<br />

AA001<br />

(34) Navigation link to matrix to define a reference contact collective message "Activation<br />

possible..."<br />

(S1) General alarm output sound activation of repeat function<br />

(S2) General alarm output sound path indication of sound file (*.wav)<br />

(S3) General alarm output sound path display of selected sound file<br />

Page 88


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

With module AA007 (system setting of the activation areas) you can assign the available<br />

alarm outputs to your activation areas (29) as you like. Simply ticking (Yes/No) in the<br />

matrix (30) determines whether, in case of a burglar alarm, the alarm output is to be<br />

released in a respective activation area or not. Therefore, the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> provides 3 individual,<br />

area-related alarm outputs SSB1Alarm, SSB2Alarm and SSB3Alarm (25) for free<br />

selection (area flash light, message etc.). This alarm output is also used internally to send<br />

SMS:<br />

See also: Function description Information message console and Project planning!<br />

The general alarm outputs flashlight/siren (26) can also be assigned to any activation area.<br />

The alarm output sound (27) generates the call of any wav-file, that can be selected by<br />

means of file search (S2). The path display (S3) shows the current path of the selected file.<br />

If you dispose of a sound system, you can create a scenario using your sound board. Thanks<br />

to the repeat function (S3) the sound file can be repeated endlessly. (The sound function is<br />

programmed in the operating terminal and works only when the operating<br />

terminal is active! (It was not possible to consider this function in the server.) The alarm<br />

output panic light (28) activates the panic function in the outside lighting matrix. In this<br />

function, all output channels that are not set to "No function" in the outside lighting matrix<br />

Page 89


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

are switched on. Ticking yes for the alarm output "Panic DÄ Auto Off" means that an active<br />

panic function is taken back automatically by the twilight switch (only if available), i.e. the<br />

next morning the outside lighting is switched off when the twilight is switched off and works<br />

as usual according to the automatic functions (useful for longer absence such as holidays).<br />

Normally, with an active panic function the outside lighting is separated from all other<br />

automatic functions (blocked) i.e. the outside lighting stays on in case of a burglar alarm and<br />

active panic function until the released area is acknowledged.<br />

The communication object Panik is provided by the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> to be integrated in a key/panel<br />

(e.g. near bed in bedroom) for direct panic function activation.<br />

Example of a key 4-fold Universal/Multifunction near bed in bedroom:<br />

Utilization example:<br />

Top left key bedroom mains disconnection<br />

Top right key siren deactivation (useful with activated alarm output "siren" and burglar<br />

alarm night, sends only "0")<br />

Key in the top left middle activation area status night (area 1, 2 or 3)<br />

Key in the top right middle standby display night (activation possible/not possible)<br />

Key in the bottom left middle night rest "On" (call of a central command in ©IQHOME.NET<br />

module ZA001 "central commands")<br />

Key in the bottom right middle night rest "Off" (call of a central command in ©IQHOME.NET<br />

module ZA001 "central commands)<br />

Bottom left key panic function "On" (activation panic function outside lighting matrix or<br />

additional internal lamps)<br />

Bottom right key panic function "Off" (deactivation panic function outside lighting matrix or<br />

additional internal lamps)<br />

Using the input mask (31) the deactivation delay (AVZ) of the alarm output "siren" can be<br />

fixed. Click on the marked field to modify the value. The value is given in seconds. When the<br />

siren is active, the current remaining time is displayed.<br />

Note:<br />

In Germany, the maximum runtime of a siren is fixed by the law and may vary (In general<br />

max. 180 seconds).<br />

The status displays (32) indicate the current condition of the alarm outputs and can be<br />

switched on or off directly by pressing the key (ON/OFF-function).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 90


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Reference contact<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

(34) Navigation link to matrix to define a reference contact for collective message<br />

"Activation possible..."<br />

(35) Selection of the available contact inputs 01-10 of 22<br />

(36) Area assignment area 1-3 (EMA [E])<br />

(37) Selection matrix to define (a) reference contact/s per area<br />

(38) Navigation link to system settings module AA007 of the alarm system<br />

(39) Navigation link to the next matrix with the contact inputs 11-20 (AA009) and 21-22 (<br />

AA010)<br />

Page 91


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The reference contact serves to exclude the collective information message "activation<br />

possible" SSB1EMAbereit (e.g. communication object EMA area 1), that is provided<br />

externally for each separate area on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> to be integrated in a key (LED) or panel<br />

near the respective activation device (within the building). The contact chosen here is then<br />

excluded from the display of the available standby communication objects (<br />

SSB1EMAbereit-SSB3EMAbereit, SSB1Nachtbereit-SSB3Nachtbereit. If a selected<br />

contact is also included in a message line, the monitoring function stays active. Only the<br />

standby display is concerned. This has the advantage that when leaving the building,<br />

contacts that are „open“ like the front door contact do not constantly generate the message<br />

„activation impossible” in your standby display (key-LED/display).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 92


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Inputs (contacts)<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

(18, 19, 20) Navigation link to matrix of the message lines with the lock monitoring<br />

contacts 01-22 (windows/doors):<br />

(40) Selection of the available contact inputs 01-10 of 22<br />

(41) Area assignment, area 1-3 (EMA [E] and night [N])<br />

(42) Selection matrix to assign the message lines (contact inputs) to the alarm areas<br />

(43) Status display of the contact inputs<br />

(44) Status display, individual with different display options<br />

(closed/open/malfunction/released)<br />

(45) Cycle monitoring of the contact inputs (can be switched on individually as an option)<br />

(46) Input mask for cycle monitoring of the contact inputs in seconds<br />

(47) Status display of the cycle monitoring (o.k./malfunction-LED flashes when monitored<br />

telegram fails)<br />

(48) Navigation link to matrix of the message lines with the lock monitoring contacts 11-20<br />

(windows/doors)<br />

(49) Navigation link to matrix of the message lines with the lock monitoring contacts 21-22<br />

(windows/doors)<br />

(50) Navigation link back to the main module alarm system information display (AID),<br />

module AA001<br />

Module AA002 (ditto AA003 contacts 11-20 and AA004 contacts 21-22)<br />

Page 93


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

©IQHOME.NET disposes of 22 contact inputs defined in the module alarm and information<br />

message console:<br />

22 pcs. inputs, information messages:<br />

Module name: AL001<br />

Name communication object: Infomeldung 01 - Infomeldung 22<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

All connected contact inputs are automatically made available in this alarm system module<br />

AA002 to be selected (40) in the matrix (42). By simply ticking (Yes/No) in the matrix (42)<br />

you define whether the contact is to be assigned to an activation area (41) in the alarm<br />

system or not. If you tick Yes for one area, this contact will be monitored. Contacts can also<br />

be applied several times and for other areas.<br />

The status display (43) indicates the current condition of the contact. The following status<br />

information (44) can be given:<br />

1. Closed ("0" signal <strong>EIB</strong>-telegram 1Bit)<br />

2. Open ("1" signal <strong>EIB</strong>-telegram 1Bit)<br />

3. Malfunction (formed internally by cycle monitoring)<br />

4. Activated! (if a "1" signal <strong>EIB</strong>-telegram 1Bit is detected with the alarm system being<br />

Page 94


activated)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The cycle monitoring (45) is an extended monitoring function for high-priority message lines<br />

(e.g. when bus line is interrupted etc.). Enter a value greater „0“ (seconds) into the input<br />

mask (46) to activate the cycle monitoring. For example, when you enter "10" at the contact<br />

input 08, the binary input must send at least one <strong>EIB</strong> telegram of the contact with the value<br />

„0“ or „1“ within 10 seconds. (cyclical sending must be set in the ETS at the binary input). If<br />

the value is not sent within the cycle time, there is a malfunction message for the sensor. (<br />

Malfunction). If a cyclically monitored input is assigned to an activation area which is<br />

active, such a malfunction will lead to an alarm (Activated) and the message "Burglar alarm"<br />

of the respective area is transmitted. When cycle monitoring sends a malfunction message,<br />

the malfunction LED (47) of the contact input flashes.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 95


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Inputs (detectors)<br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

(21, 22) Navigation link to matrix of the message lines with the motion detector inputs<br />

01-15:<br />

(51) Selection of the available motion detector inputs 01-10 of 15<br />

(52) Area assignment, area 1-3 (EMA [E] and night [N])<br />

(53) Selection matrix to assign the message lines (motion detector inputs) to the alarm<br />

areas<br />

(54) Status display of the motion detectors<br />

(55) Status display individual with different display options (o.k. [no<br />

motion]/motion/malfunction/set off)<br />

(56) Cycle monitoring of the motion detector inputs (can be switched on individually as an<br />

option)<br />

(57) Input mask for cycle monitoring of the motion detector inputs in seconds<br />

(58) Status display of the cycle monitoring (o.k./malfunction LED flashes when monitored<br />

telegram fails)<br />

(59) Navigation link to matrix of the message lines with motion detector inputs 11-15<br />

(motion detector)<br />

(60) Navigation link back to the main module alarm system information display (AID),<br />

module AA001<br />

Module AA005 (ditto AA006 motion detector inputs 11-15)<br />

Page 96


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

©IQHOME.NET disposes of 15 motion detector inputs. Using the available communication<br />

objects any motion detectors (even conventional motion detectors over 230VAC binary input<br />

"bus-compatible") can be connected. An advantage of <strong>EIB</strong> is the double use of motion<br />

detectors for lighting and message operation. Thus, it is not necessary to install additional<br />

detectors for alarm systems. This is achieved by so-called "Comfort motion<br />

detectors/Universal motion detectors" with additional ETS application for lighting and<br />

message purposes.<br />

Example:<br />

Alarm motion detector<br />

Universal-Comfort<br />

Page 97


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Ref. No.: N167568<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: JUNG<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 3180-1A<br />

It is of special importance to be able to parameterise different sensitivity for message<br />

operation. This is especially useful because you can respond to the different ambient<br />

conditions of different installation place. Furthermore, false alarms are almost impossible.<br />

The <strong>EIB</strong> has to inform these motion detectors of the change from lighting operation into<br />

message operation. This is done by a separate communication object. (Designation in the<br />

ETS "operating mode"). When the alarm system is "active", the motion detector is to go over<br />

into message operation. ©IQHOME.NET provides this switch-over for all areas by means of<br />

the communication objects:<br />

Output status area-3 EMA and 1-3 night (active/not active):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1EMAStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = system area 1 EMA is active<br />

"0" = system area 1 EMA is not active<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1NachtStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = system area 1 night is active<br />

"0" = system area 1 night is not active<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2EMAStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = system area 2 EMA is active<br />

"0" = system area 2 EMA is not active<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2NachtStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = system area 2 night is active<br />

"0" = system area 2 night is not active<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3EMAStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = system area 3 EMA is active<br />

"0" = system area 3 EMA is not active<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3NachtStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = system area 3 night is active<br />

"0" = system area 3 night is not active<br />

Simply connect the communication objects of ©IQHOME.NET with the communication<br />

objects (operating mode) of the motion detectors by means of group addresses. If one<br />

motion detector has a multiple assignment in one area EMA and night, both status addresses<br />

(EMA+night S/U) provided by ©IQHOME.NET have to be entered at the motion detector<br />

object "operating mode".<br />

Page 98


15 pcs. inputs, motion detectors:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: AA005<br />

Name communication object: Melder01 - Melder10<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Module name: AA006<br />

Name communication object: Melder11 - Melder15<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Depending on their type (lighting operation only or lighting and message operation), the <strong>EIB</strong><br />

motion detectors are connected with the following ©IQHOME.NET communication objects by<br />

means of the ETS object "Switching" or "Message/Alarm". Using the ETS, the ©IQHOME.NET<br />

acknowledgement object of the respective activation area (SSB1Quitt, SSB2Quitt,<br />

SSB3Quitt) must be entered into the "Switching" or "Message/Alarm" objects.<br />

All connected motion detector inputs are provided in the matrix (53) for selection (51). By<br />

simply ticking Yes in the matrix (53) you define whether the contact is assigned to an<br />

activation area (52) in the alarm system or nor. When you tick yes in one area, this motion<br />

detector input will be monitored.<br />

Different from the matrix of the contact inputs, motion detector inputs can not be set<br />

several times for different areas!<br />

Multiple assignment are only possible within one area (EMA/night). If you do try to assign<br />

one motion detector input to more than one activation area, a message window with the<br />

following text pops up:<br />

"This motion detector input has already been assigned to one activation area. Do you want to<br />

overwrite these settings? Please consider possible parameterisations at the motion detectors<br />

by means of ETS!"<br />

If the question is answered with "OK", previously made selections are deleted and the new<br />

selection is set.<br />

The status display (54) shows the current contact condition. The following status<br />

information (55) can be given:<br />

1. o.K. ("0" signal <strong>EIB</strong>-telegram 1Bit)<br />

2. Movement ("1" signal <strong>EIB</strong>-telegram 1Bit)<br />

3. Malfunction (formed internally by cycle monitoring)<br />

4. Activated! (when a "1" signal <strong>EIB</strong>-telegram 1Bit is detected with the alarm system being<br />

active)<br />

The cycle monitoring (56) is an extended monitoring function for high-priority message lines<br />

(e.g. when bus line is interrupted etc.). Enter a value greater „0“ (seconds) into the input<br />

mask (57) to activate the cycle monitoring. For example, when you enter "10" at the contact<br />

input 10 (40), the binary input must send at least one <strong>EIB</strong> telegram of the contact with the<br />

value „0“ or „1“ within 10 seconds. (cyclical sending must be set in the ETS at the binary<br />

input). If the value is not sent within the cycle time, there is a malfunction message for the<br />

sensor. (Malfunction). If a cyclically monitored input is assigned to an activation area which<br />

is active, such a malfunction will lead to an alarm(Activated) and the message "Burglar<br />

alarm" of the respective area is transmitted. When cycle monitoring sends a malfunction<br />

message, the malfunction LED (58) of the contact input flashes.<br />

Page 99


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 100


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Burglar alarm system<br />

Within the project panning software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group<br />

addresses can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Alarm system data point list:<br />

Module AL001:<br />

The contact inputs 01-22 are available via module AL001 (information message inputs):<br />

Page 101


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When delivered, there are already assigned group addresses, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility by using the project software to delete and replace them. Several group addresses<br />

can be assigned to one communication object. For details please refer to the technical<br />

manual "Project planning".<br />

Information message inputs (windows/doors/sabotage message etc.):<br />

22 pcs. inputs, information messages:<br />

Module name: AL001<br />

Name communication object: Infomeldung 01 - Infomeldung 22<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Module AA002-AA003<br />

Motion detector inputs:<br />

Page 102


15 pcs. inputs, motion detectors:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: AA002-AA003<br />

Name communication object: Melder01 - Melder15<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Module AA001<br />

Area-related inputs and outputs:<br />

Area 1:<br />

Page 103


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

01 pc. input/output, activation/deactivation area EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1EMA<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation<br />

"0" = Deactivation<br />

01 pc. area-related alarm output area1:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1Alarm<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Alarm<br />

01 pc. output, standby display area EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1EMAbereit<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation possible<br />

"0" = Activation impossible<br />

01 pc. output, status area EMA (active/not active):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1EMAStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = System is active<br />

"0" = System is not active<br />

01 pc. output, LED-triggering at the activation device (yellow/ge) area1 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1LEDge<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit), pulse 3 seconds "1", when activation successful<br />

"1" = activation (countdown) has been successful (3 seconds "1", after that "0")<br />

01 pc. output, LED-triggering at activation device (green/gn) area1 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1LEDgn<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit), pulse 3 seconds "1", when deactivation successful<br />

"1" = deactivation has been successful (3 seconds "1", after that “0")<br />

01 pc. input/output, activation/deactivation area1 night:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1Nacht<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation<br />

"0" = Deactivation<br />

01 pc. output, standby display area1 night:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1Nachtbereit<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation possible<br />

"0" = Activation impossible<br />

Page 104


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

01 pc. output, status area1 night (active/not active):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1NachtStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = System is active<br />

"0" = System is not active<br />

01 pc. input/output, acknowledgement key (valid for EMA and night):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB1Quitt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Only "0" is sent and evaluated.<br />

Area 2:<br />

01 pc. input/output, activation/deactivation area2 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2EMA<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation<br />

"0" = Deactivation<br />

01 pc. area-related alarm output area2:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2Alarm<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Alarm<br />

01 pc. output, standby display area2 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2EMAbereit<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation possible<br />

"0" = Activation impossible<br />

01 pc. output, status area2 EMA (active/not active):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2EMAStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = System is active<br />

"0" = System is not active<br />

01 pc. output, LED-triggering at activation device (yellow/ge) area2 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2LEDge<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit), pulse 3 seconds "1", when activation successful<br />

"1" = activation (countdown) has been successful (3 seconds "1", after that "0")<br />

01 pc. output, LED-triggering at activation device (green/gn) area2 EMA:<br />

Page 105


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2LEDgn<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit), pulse 3 seconds "1", when deactivation successful<br />

"1" = deactivation has been successful (3 seconds "1", after that "0")<br />

01 pc. input/output, activation/deactivation area2 night:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2Nacht<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation<br />

"0" = Deactivation<br />

01 pc. output, standby display area2 night:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2Nachtbereit<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation possible<br />

"0" = Activation impossible<br />

01 pcs. output, status area2 night (active/not active):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2NachtStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = System is active<br />

"0" = System is not active<br />

01 pc. input/output, acknowledgement key (valid for EMA and night):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB2Quitt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Only "0" is sent and evaluated.<br />

Area 3:<br />

01 pc. input/output, activation/deactivation area3 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3EMA<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation<br />

"0" = Deactivation<br />

01 pc. area-related alarm output area3:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3Alarm<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Alarm<br />

01 pc. output, standby display area3 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3EMAbereit<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Page 106


"1" = Activation possible<br />

"0" = Activation impossible<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

01 pc. output, status area3 EMA (active/not active):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3EMAStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = System is active<br />

"0" = System is not active<br />

01 pc. output, LED-triggering at activation device (yellow/ge) area3 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3LEDge<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit), pulse 3 seconds "1", when activation successful<br />

"1" = Activation (countdown) has been successful (3 seconds "1", after that "0")<br />

01 pc. output, LED-triggering at activation device (green/gn) area3 EMA:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3LEDgn<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit), pulse 3 seconds "1", when deactivation successful<br />

"1" = Deactivation has been successful (3 seconds "1", after that "0")<br />

01 pc. input/output, activation/deactivation area3 night:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3Nacht<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation<br />

"0" = Deactivation<br />

01 pc. output, standby display area3 night:<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3Nachtbereit<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Activation possible<br />

"0" = Activation impossible<br />

01 pc. output, status area3 night (active/not active):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3NachtStatus<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = System is active<br />

"0" = System is not active<br />

01 pc. input/output, acknowledgement key (valid for EMA and night):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSB3Quitt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point output: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Only "0" is sent and evaluated.<br />

01 pc. output, flashlight (general):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Page 107


Name communication object: SSBOptisch<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Active<br />

"0" = Not active<br />

01 pc. output, siren (general):<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSBSirene<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Active with freely definable switch-off delay<br />

"0" = Not active<br />

01 pc. output, sound (generally available for other applications, too):<br />

Module name: AA001<br />

Name communication object: SSBSound<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Active<br />

"0" = Not active<br />

1 pc. input/output, panic key (module outside lighting matrix)<br />

Module name: AB001<br />

Name communication object: Panik<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

"1" = Active<br />

"0" = Not active<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 108


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Info-Alarm-Message<br />

Alarm- and Info-Message System<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 109


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Alarm- and Info-Message System<br />

On your premises (house, flat, garden house) there will always be information about<br />

important equipment and facilities that are only available as status information. However, a<br />

careful check of even the most important messages is often neglected. (daily round). In<br />

addition to that, this information is often hard to access and check (within the heating<br />

control panel, at the pump operating panel behind the boiler, at the coarse surge protection<br />

under the house connection box or even in shafts).<br />

All this information can be put on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> system by means of binary inputs <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

(10V, 24V, 230V) or other suitable interfaces and transmitted for central visualization.<br />

Thus, a check round is no longer necessary. Reading the alarm list you can even see when a<br />

message was received or when and by whom this message was acknowledged. Furthermore,<br />

in case of an alarm, an SMS or mail can be sent to your mobile phone.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 110


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Alarm- and Info-Message System<br />

� Integrated message system for 13 alarm messages, incl. alarm manager with history<br />

administration (alarm list) and a pre-alarm as well as collective alarm output (master<br />

alarm) with variable delay (retriggerable)<br />

� All 13 alarm messages are administered separately in the alarm list<br />

� Acknowledgement function for single alarms and collective alarms<br />

� Automatic alarm list pop-up in case of alarm can be parameterized<br />

� Alarm status and number of incoming alarms are also displayed by the front start page of<br />

IQHOME.NET<br />

� 14 SMS alarm messages can be activated individually (13 single and one collective alarm)<br />

� Individual parameterizing of phone numbers by means of Admin Console possible during<br />

runtime<br />

� Status display for 22 info-messages, e.g. windows and doors<br />

� User-defined labelling of alarms and messages<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 111


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Alarm- and Info-Message System<br />

To use this module, especially the alarm console, the following is required:<br />

� To transmit SMS information the modem type recommended under www.eibmarkt.com<br />

should be used (Microlink 56k Fun USB).<br />

� Pre-configurated for D1/D2/EPlus (GSM/UMTS) networks, other networks can be<br />

integrated in the "Services" file that is also supplied.<br />

There are no other preconditions to use this module. However, there should be alarms &<br />

messages (1Bit) connected via binary inputs in your <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> facility (malfunction, alarm,<br />

status and operating messages), to display and process information.<br />

Note:<br />

Basically, it might be required to make special adjustments in your operating system &<br />

modem to permit SMS. We cannot give any support for this kind of specification.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

V.92-Internet-Modem with USB<br />

Ref. No.: N490020<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: Microlink<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 56k Fun USB<br />

IQHOME.NET is equipped with an alarm and information message console which has already<br />

been pre-configurated for the SMS dispatch of 13 single alarm messages and 1 collective<br />

error message with services for the GSM/UMTS D1/D2 and E-PLUS networks. Other networks<br />

can also be integrated but have not been tested. Due to the complex activations and the fact<br />

that the parameters do not have a uniform standard for all modem types, the comprehensive<br />

tests have been run for one modem type which can thus be recommended here: Microlink<br />

Page 112


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

56k Fun USB (analog). Extract from the alarm and information message console<br />

IQHOME.NET.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 113


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Alarm- and Info-Message System<br />

The surface of the alarm and und information message console consists of an operating page<br />

(Module AL001) with 13 alarm messages (inputs), 1 collective alarm (output) and 22 single<br />

messages (inputs, information messages):<br />

(01) Display of the 13 single alarm messages<br />

(02) Display of the respective individual labels of the single alarm messages<br />

(03) Condition of the alarm inputs<br />

(04) Display of the current delay time for the collective alarm<br />

(05) Nominal value for delay time (0-900 sec.) for the collective alarm<br />

(06) Remaining time display in % when delay and status LED are active<br />

(07) Remaining time display as text when delay and status LED of the collective alarm are<br />

active<br />

(08) Button to restart the alarm delay when delay is active<br />

(09) Administration menu for alarm bar (symbol "bell")<br />

(10) Display of the 22 information messages and the respective individual labels<br />

(11) Condition of the information message inputs<br />

(12) User-defined labelling of the alarm and information message console<br />

(13) Module designation for internal project planning (Designation is used in database for<br />

quick identification)<br />

(14) Navigation link main menu (button being pressed with active, flashing white LED<br />

below, if selected, our example "Tools")<br />

(15) Navigation link submenu Tools<br />

(button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Alarm and information message console")<br />

(16) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

(17) Display of alarm bar after call by means of administration menu for alarm bar (symbol<br />

"bell") (09)<br />

(18) Display of the active alarm messages with date and time<br />

(19) Display of the data point name (fixed)<br />

(20) Display of the user, who has eventually acknowledged<br />

(21) Display of a possibly integrated acknowledgement text<br />

(22) Call of the administration console (Start>Programmes>Elvis>Administration) to edit<br />

the message ports during runtime<br />

(23) Display of the currently integrated message recipients for SMS messages<br />

(24) Attribute window of an integrated message recipient in general (number input... [25])<br />

(26) Attribute window of an integrated message recipient notification (assignment of the<br />

alarm messages to the message recipients)<br />

(27) Definition of the message assignments to the selected message recipients: MG1 =<br />

message group1 = alarm message01<br />

Page 114


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 115


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 116


Alarm console function logic (01)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

In the alarm console the connected alarm inputs (01) (see <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list) are<br />

monitored with a leading edge (logic "1" [Bit]). It is not important whether the alarm inputs<br />

are completely occupied or only a single alarm message is connected. The alarm messages<br />

must be set to "read" at the binary input (read flag ETS). W hen the input is sent (logic "1"<br />

[Bit]), the respective red LED (03) flashes and the alarm console with the collective alarm<br />

starts the following functions:<br />

A possibly adjusted delay time (04)(05) starts and the message LED "Alarm is coming"<br />

(pre-alarm) (06) is activated. This pre-alarm is sent on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>. The current remaining<br />

time until master alarm activation (collective alarm) is indicated (06). By pressing the<br />

button "Restart alarm console (Retrigger)" (08) the delay stage with the current parameters<br />

(04)(05) is restarted. This data point is also available via <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> (Quitttung SSM<br />

Alarmkonsole). The acknowledgement by means of an external <strong>EIB</strong> key must be<br />

parameterised in the ETS as follows (press "On", let go "Off" or adjust "Off only" (value logic<br />

"0" [Bit] for each transmission).<br />

After delay time completion the master alarm (collective alarm) (07) is activated and a<br />

telegram (logic "1" [Bit]) is sent on the output object SSM Alarmkonsole. The message<br />

"collective alarm" is now indicated in the alarm list together with time and date (17).<br />

For the master alarm output (collective alarm) it is not important whether an alarm input is<br />

sent cyclically or not. A master alarm modification (collective alarm) on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Bus<br />

only occurs in case of a value modification of the total linkage result for the master alarm<br />

(collective alarm).<br />

W hen the alarm list is set to automatic display in case of alarm (09), this is indicated on<br />

every visualization page in form of an alarm list (17) for active single or master alarm. In<br />

addition to that, a sound or *wav file can be played.<br />

An active single alarm message (logic "1" [Bit]) is immediately entered in the alarm list and,<br />

if required, a respective message port (e.g. SMS) (22) is activated to send a message to a<br />

message recipient (23).<br />

The following SMS message ports were provided with standard message texts (can be<br />

changed freely) and be assigned to two (when delivered) or any number of message<br />

recipients. The SMS function is not active when the unit is delivered and must be<br />

parameterised by means of the admin console, if required.<br />

The following assignments have already been defined:<br />

1. Alarm message 01 = message group 01 (MG 01), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 01 is active!"<br />

2. Alarm message 02 = message group 02 (MG 02), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 02 is active!"<br />

3. Alarm message 03 = message group 03 (MG 03), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 03 is active!"<br />

4. Alarm message 04 = message group 04 (MG 04), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 04 is active!"<br />

5. Alarm message 05 = message group 05 (MG 05), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 05 is active!"<br />

6. Alarm message 06 = message group 06 (MG 06), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 06 is active!"<br />

7. Alarm message 07 = message group 07 (MG 07), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 07 is active!"<br />

Page 117


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

8. Alarm message 08 = message group 08 (MG 08), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 08 is active!"<br />

9. Alarm message 09 = message group 09 (MG 09), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 09 is active!"<br />

10. Alarm message 10 = message group 10 (MG 10), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 10 is active!"<br />

11. Alarm message 11 = message group 11 (MG 11), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 11 is active!"<br />

12. Alarm message 12 = message group 12 (MG 12), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 12 is active!"<br />

13. Alarm message 13 = message group 13 (MG 13), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 13 is active!"<br />

14. Collective alarm = message group 14 (MG 14), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm<br />

message 14 (main alarm) is active!"<br />

15. Sensor SSM = message group 00 (MG 00), message text: "IQHOME.NET: Alarm message<br />

00 (weather sensor system) is active!" This alarm output is not integrated in the alarm<br />

and information message console. Thus, the message is only shown optically in the alarm<br />

list or on the start page. The alarm output "Sensor SSM" is not considered in the delay<br />

stage of the function logic. The alarm output "Sensor SSM" is released and sen on the<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> when at least one cycle monitoring of an activated sensor input has been<br />

switched on in the sensor system toolbar and the monitored sensor input has not sent a<br />

telegram within the cycle time adjusted.<br />

16. Alarm message 15 = message group 15 (MG 15), message text: "Alarm Message<br />

area_01" (burglar alarm area 1)<br />

17. Alarm message 16 = message group 15 (MG 16), message text: "Alarm Message<br />

area_02" (burglar alarm area 2)<br />

Alarm message 17 = message group 15 (MG 17), message text: "Alarm Message area_03"<br />

(burglar alarm area 3)<br />

Page 118


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

(22) Calling the administration console (Start>Programmes>Elvis>Administration) to edit<br />

the message ports during runtime<br />

(23) Display of the currently integrated message recipients for SMS messages<br />

(24)Attribute window of an integrated message recipient in general (number input... [25])<br />

(26) Attribute window of an integrated message recipient notification (assignment of the<br />

alarm messages to the message recipients)<br />

(27) Definition of the message assignments to the selected message recipients: MG1 =<br />

message group1 = alarm messge01<br />

Alarm list (17)<br />

In the alarm list (open see: view-menu) the alarm file entries are indicated. You can filter<br />

which alarms are shown:<br />

� all: all alarm messages are shown in the list<br />

� active: only currently active alarm messages are shown in the list<br />

� not acknowledged: only alarm messages that have not been acknowledged are shown in<br />

the list<br />

� Since: date starting from which the entries are shown. To display the alarm<br />

status the following symbols are used:<br />

Page 119


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

the upper limit has been exceeded<br />

the lower limit has been fallen short of<br />

the alarm has been acknowledged<br />

the value is (again) within the admissible range<br />

In addition to that, the time and a designation are given in the list. For acknowledgements<br />

the user and perhaps the acknowledgement text are given. An alarm can only be<br />

acknowledged as long as it is active. Double-click on an alarm in the list to open the<br />

acknowledgement dialogue. Here you may also enter a comment message text.<br />

Information message console (10)(11)<br />

The information message console serves as a central and clear display of any message such<br />

as status message (doors, windows etc.). A maximum of 22 <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> information message<br />

inputs can be administrated. The information messages must be set to „Read“ at the binary<br />

input (read flag ETS). In case of release, the integrated status displays (yellow LEDs)<br />

respond (logic "1" [Bit]) as active brightly shining yellow LED (11). These messages are not<br />

processed in the alarm console or shown in the alarm list. However, integration in the alarm<br />

list or SMS can be realized using the project planning software in the database. All<br />

information message texts (10) can be created as you like by means of the label editor<br />

(separate page) (16).<br />

Labelling the alarm and information message inputs (16)<br />

Labelling the alarm and information message inputs permits orientation of the user. The<br />

label can be modified on another page.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 120


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 121


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Alarm- and Info-Message System<br />

Within the project panning software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group<br />

addresses can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list alarm and info message console:<br />

Module AL001:<br />

Alarm inputs:<br />

Page 122


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

13 pc. inputs, alarm messages:<br />

Module name: AL001<br />

Name communication object: Alarmmeldung 01 - Alarmmeldung 13<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Information message inputs:<br />

Page 123


22 pcs. inputs, information messages:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: AL001<br />

Name communication object: Infomeldung 01 - Infomeldung 22<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Acknowledgement input (restart alarm console (Retrigger)):<br />

1 pc. input, acknowledgement alarm console (restart alarm console [Retrigger]):<br />

Module name: AL001<br />

Name communication object: Quitttung SSM Alarmkonsole<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Alarm outputs:<br />

Page 124


1 pc. output, "Pre-alarm":<br />

Module name: AL001<br />

Name communication object: Alarm kommt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

1 pc. output, "Master alarm":<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: AL001<br />

Name communication object: SSM Alarmkonsole<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 125


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Outside lighting matrix<br />

Outside lighting matrix<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 126


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Outside Lighting Matrix<br />

The outside lighting matrix serves for function administration of a 10 channel- outside<br />

lighting control with variable function combination. Here we use 4 internal timer clocks, 1<br />

twilight switch from a selection of max. 7 sensor inputs, 5 motion detectors with or without<br />

brightness influence and 1 panic function.<br />

When building their own house many owners are worried about problems other than their<br />

electrician’s question: where to put which outside lamps, and how and from are these lamps<br />

to be switched on and on which conditions?<br />

The answer: .(...) it does not matter because we are using the <strong>EIB</strong> advantages and can<br />

change programming at any time.(...). But also the programmer wants to start his work<br />

because when the owners move into their new home, the outside light should work<br />

„somehow“.<br />

Subsequent modifications are often made as follows:<br />

The owner does not like the function of the gate lamps and contacts the <strong>EIB</strong>-programmer.<br />

They fix an appointment, the modifications are made and cost money. Two days later the<br />

lady of the house thinks it was somehow better as it was before but we should. (...), the<br />

story starts again!<br />

That is why we have looked for a possibility to change the „programming“ without any<br />

programming tools or any special knowledge at any time. The result is a „Matrix“ (linkage<br />

table) where all usual functions of up to 10 outside lights can be administrated. The operator<br />

defines linkages with „Yes/No“ which would otherwise include a great deal of work.<br />

The following modifications can be made by the operator themselves:<br />

� Changing the switching times with a better operating comfort than before<br />

� Changing the twilight limit<br />

� Changing the switch-off delay of the twilight switch<br />

� Changing the twilight/clock function<br />

� Variable assignment of 4 twilight/clock functions to the outside lamps (matrix 40<br />

channels)<br />

� Variable assignment of max. 5 motion detectors to the outside lamps (matrix 50<br />

channels)<br />

� Changing the motion detector function<br />

� Using the panic function (alarm system control)<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 127


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 128


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Outside lighting matrix<br />

Control of up to 10 different switching groups with the following functions and attributes:<br />

� 10 channel outside lighting matrix with 9 control channels each (4 automatic programs &<br />

5 motion detector programs). Thus, complex, individual scenes are possible.<br />

� Total scene memory as back up memory (Load from or to Standard)<br />

� Each of the 10 outside lighting channels can be assigned to a selection of control<br />

channels, these always represent an „OR“- link<br />

� Each of the 10 outside lighting channels has an operating mode switch with the operating<br />

modes „Automatic“, „Manual operation ON“, „Manual operation OFF“ and „No function“ as<br />

well as a clock program for automatic switch-over of the operating modes.<br />

� Status display of the basic situation and direct switching possibility<br />

� 4 separate control channels „Time switch/Twilight“ with the functions „ON“, „OFF“,<br />

„Twilight only“, „Clock only“ as well as „Clock + Twilight“<br />

� 5 separate control channels Motion/Twilight with the function „Motion“, „Motion +<br />

External twilight sensor“, „Motion + Twilight sensor of the motion detector“ and „OFF“<br />

� User-defined labelling of the outside lighting channels<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 129


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Outside lighting matrix<br />

Preconditions for the function of this control matrix are as manifold as their own functions. If<br />

you intent to use the integrated twilight function, you either need an <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> brightness<br />

sensor in lx or klux or a <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> (2Byte) twilight switch or a twilight switch of the 1Bit type.<br />

If you do not need a twilight function, these inputs are not significant. The same refers to the<br />

max. 5 motion detector inputs. If you want to control your facility only depending on time<br />

and light, no motion detectors are required. Without all inputs (brightness/twilight and<br />

motion detector) the matrix still represents a 4 to 10 channel clock distributor with panic<br />

function (alarm system).<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

Description<br />

Weather station <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

Ref. No.: N300057<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: THEBEN<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 132 9 200<br />

• Records wind speed, rain, brightness and temperature<br />

• The measured variables can be transmitted directly on the bus.<br />

• Wind speed, brightness, temperature are transmitted as values, rain as 1 bit<br />

• Wind speed can be transmitted either in m/s or km/h<br />

• The data are evaluated in the device itself<br />

• Powered from bus voltage, 230 V are required if rain sensors are used<br />

• Brightness range 1–100,000 lux<br />

• Temperature range –20 °C ... +55 °C<br />

• 4 universal channels (AND linked)<br />

• 3 sun protection channels (specifically for blind and shutter application)<br />

• A teach-in feature for the brightness threshold is available. It enables thresholds to be set<br />

retrospectively by the push of a button without the device having to be reconfigured.<br />

• Integrated bus coupler<br />

• Integrated heater for rain sensor<br />

Page 130


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

• Automated sun protection mechanism for independent control of blind, awning etc.<br />

• The teach-in features are user-friendly and enable the customer to retrospectively define<br />

the threshold with the touch of a button. This does not require the weather station to be<br />

re-configured.<br />

• The automated sun protection mechanism independently controls the blind<br />

(shutter/awning) during the day, no manual intervention necessary. When a threshold is<br />

reached, two separate messages can be sent, e.g. for height and slat of a blind or a value<br />

and switching message.<br />

• The different channels can have any configuration<br />

Benefits<br />

• The only <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> weather station that records and evaluates all variables in one housing.<br />

• Device is connected directly to the bus, no other cables need be laid.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 131


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Outside lighting matrix<br />

(01) Sensor selection for twilight function<br />

(02) Current value of the control channels „Timer clock" programmes 1-4 (call via [19]),<br />

by pressing the key, manual operation of the clock till the next switching telegram<br />

possible<br />

(03) current value of the control channels "Motion detector inputs" 1-5, by pressing the key,<br />

manual motion detector operation till the next<br />

switching telegram possible<br />

(04) Function definition of the control channels "Timer clock/twilight", can be switched over<br />

by pressing the key: "Permanent off", "Permanent<br />

on", "Timer clock-controlled", "Twilight-controlled", "Timer clock and twilight-controlled"<br />

(05) Function definition of the control channels "Motion detector", can be switched over<br />

by pressing the key: „Motion“, „Motion + Twilight sensor“,<br />

„Motion + Twilight sensor of motion detector“ and „OFF“<br />

(06) Function matrix to assign the outside lighting channels to the function definitions<br />

(07) User-defined labelling of the outside lighting channels 1-10<br />

(08) Operating mode switch of the outside lighting channels 1-10, can be switched over<br />

by pressing the key: „Automatic“, „Manual operation ON“, „Manual operation OFF“<br />

and „No function“<br />

(09) Status displays of the outside lighting channels with manual direct switching<br />

(10) Current value display with limit value adjustment<br />

(11) Setting the switch-off delay (AVZ 0-900s) in case of limit shortfall<br />

(twilight), the display above serve to indicate a sensor malfunction<br />

(12) Remaining time display in % with active delay and status LED when twilight is active<br />

(13) Remaining time display as text with active delay<br />

(14) Tools for using the matrix: "Reset" the matrix table (empty), "Save" the matrix table<br />

(saves the current setting), "Load" the matrix table<br />

(loads the last saved ("Save") matrix data and ("Panic")<br />

(Man. release of the panic function at the outputs 1-10)<br />

(15) Module designation for internal project planning<br />

(Designation is used in the database for quick identification)<br />

(16) Navigation link main menu<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below,<br />

if selected, our example "Outside light")<br />

(17) Navigation link submenu outside light<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below,<br />

if selected, our example "Matrix")<br />

(18) Navigation link submenu settings<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below,<br />

if selected, our example "Sensor system toolbar")<br />

(19) Calling the timer clock programmes for the control channels „Timer clock" programmes<br />

1-4 (base menu)<br />

(20) Calling the timer clock programmes for the automatic operating mode control (08)<br />

of the outside lighting channels 1-10<br />

(21) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

Page 132


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Sensor selection for outside lighting control (01)<br />

Individual input values (brightness sensors <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>) can be used for the outside lighting<br />

matrix. Selection is made using the drop down menu (01). Depending on the number of<br />

sensors in your <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> facility and the sensors that have been connected as inputs to the<br />

sensor system toolbar, these sensors are provided for selection in the drop down menu. If<br />

there is no active sensor, the twilight is set internally to active (safety reasons). It is only the<br />

initialisation of a measured value that starts a new calculation and a current linkage result is<br />

sent.<br />

Labelling the outside lighting channels (07)<br />

The label of the outside lighting channels serves for user orientation. The label is modified on<br />

another page.<br />

Function matrix (06)<br />

With the function matrix the real connection between the control channels (02),(03) and<br />

the outside lighting channels (09) is established. A control channel can only influence an<br />

outside channel after it has been ticked accordingly in the matrix. Several ticks per outside<br />

channel represent an OR function, i.e. as soon as a ticked control channel is active the<br />

outside channel can be controlled. An outside channel can only become inactive, when all<br />

Page 133


ticked control channels are inactive.<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Operating mode switch of the outside lighting channels (08)<br />

The operating mode switches are applied to influence the channel operating mode without<br />

constant changes of the function matrix. The operating modes include: „Automatic“, „Manual<br />

Off“, „No function“ and „Manual On“ and are switched in the following sequence as soon as<br />

the key is pressed:<br />

The operating modes (08) have the following functions:<br />

Automatic<br />

The output (08) follows the conditions of the control channels (02)(03) as defined in the<br />

matrix. The panic function (14) can also access the output channel.<br />

Manual Off<br />

The output is always off, but the panic function still has access to the output channel.<br />

Manual On<br />

The output is always on.<br />

No function<br />

The output is no longer triggered by the outside lighting matrix. If other sensors (push<br />

button switches etc.) in the <strong>EIB</strong> system that for instance do not have direct access to the<br />

respective actuator channel and do not respond via matrix, the switching commands are<br />

overwritten by the matrix without fixed cycle. This results from the fact that modification at<br />

the inputs (twilight switch, clock, motion detector) lead to new calculations of the matrix. If<br />

the status of the external sensor (push-button switch or similar) at the actuator is to be<br />

kept, this operating mode must be chosen.<br />

Time-depending operating mode switch-over<br />

A second timer clock (20) was provided for the matrix to control the operating modes of the<br />

individual channels. The applicable value range is 0..3. The values correspond to the<br />

following operating modes:<br />

Value 0 = manual Off,<br />

Value 1 = No function<br />

Value 2 = Manual On<br />

Value 3 = Automatic<br />

Values outside this value range will be ignored. The operating mode set at last remains<br />

unchanged.<br />

Page 134


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Examples for the use of the operating mode timer clock for repeated processes:<br />

The lighting (neon lamps) of a loading bay in a small company is switched on by means<br />

of a control channel (Timer clock/twilight) from the beginning of twilight until 10 p.m.<br />

After 10 p.m. a second control channel (motion detector) takes over this function. On<br />

Mondays and Wednesdays a delivery service delivers goods at 11 p.m. Unloading takes<br />

approx. 30 minutes. The constant motion detector switching disturbs. Using an operating<br />

mode timer clock the operating mode „Manual On“ (9.55 p.m.) and after that „Automatic“<br />

(10.35 p.m.) could be selected at the respective times.<br />

Status display of the output (09)<br />

This display is in direct connection with the actuator and indicates, as far as no other<br />

addresses have been programmed at the actuator channel, the switching condition of the<br />

actuator. To ensure a correct status message of the actuator its read flag must have been<br />

set. If the actuator disposes of status feedback messages, this group address must also be<br />

entered at this object as sending and with read flag. In this specific case the read flag at the<br />

input object of the actuator must be deleted. If you generate a separate group address for<br />

the feedback message, it must be entered in the respective communication object in the<br />

project database as second group address and set to reading by giving the sign ">" At the<br />

communication object "Feedback" of the actuator the read flag must be activated.<br />

The output status display was designed to be operated. Thus, a user may also access the<br />

actuator directly.<br />

Control channel/ timer clock/twilight (02)(04)<br />

There are 4 similar, freely definable control channels timer clock/twilight to trigger the<br />

matrix.<br />

Example clock active (LED on, flashing) and inactive (LED off)<br />

The inputs „On“, „Off“ and „Twilight“ of all control channels are identical. A difference of<br />

the control channels lies only in the use of different timer clocks (19). Furthermore,<br />

there is the option to set the function of each control channel separately. Using different<br />

timer clocks and setting the different function of the control channel separately permits<br />

to control outside lighting areas in a different ways (entrance area, inner court, garage<br />

driveway etc.).<br />

Description of the functions<br />

Page 135


Function „Timer clock/twilight“:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The most common outside lighting function is „Timer clock/twilight“.<br />

The switching times for this function could be as follows: daily 6 a.m. On, 10 p.m. Off.<br />

The outside lighting would have the following functions:<br />

6 a.m. timer clock switches on ---> light On<br />

in the morning, twilight switch sends „Day“ ---> light Off<br />

in the evening, twilight switch sends „Night“ ---> light On<br />

10 p.m., timer clock switches off ---> light Off<br />

If the twilight switch sends „Day“ before 6 a.m., no light is switched on in the morning.<br />

Function „Twilight only“<br />

An outside lighting operated in this way would switch on in the evening and off in the<br />

morning (e.g. number at entrance gate).<br />

Function „Timer clock only“<br />

An outside lighting operated in this way would switch on and off according to the switching<br />

times defined in the respective timer clock channel (e.g. illuminated Christmas tree in<br />

garden).<br />

Function „On“, „Off“<br />

These functions are only meant to complete the range and can be used to switch whole areas<br />

(all outside lightings that are connected with this control channel) immediately on or off (e.g.<br />

to check the function of all lights by day etc.).<br />

Control channels „Motion/Twilight“ (03)(05)<br />

There are 5 similar control channels Motion/twilight to trigger the matrix.<br />

Example motion detector active (LED on, flashing) and inactive (LED off)<br />

Page 136


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

An outside lamp group (1-10) connected with this control is controlled additionally or<br />

separately depending on the motion detector. It is possible to set the function of each<br />

individual control channel separately.<br />

Function „Motion“<br />

For matrix activation the output signal of a motion detector or a motion detector group<br />

(Master- Slave) is used directly. For control, the setting of the local motion detector (with or<br />

without twilight function) is taken.<br />

Function „Motion/Twilight“<br />

The output signal of a motion detector or a motion detector group (Master- Slave) is AND<br />

linked with the matrix-own twilight switch.<br />

Only as soon as the twilight switch signalises „Night“, a motion signal leads to the activation<br />

of the control channel output (1-10).<br />

Function „Off“<br />

The control channel in inactive.<br />

Why are there the two functions „Motion“ and „Motion/Twilight“?<br />

If all outside lighting channels are to work starting from a uniform twilight value (because it<br />

looks better), the function „Motion/Twilight“ must be selected. This function has<br />

another advantage: the motion detectors can be operated irrespective of the brightness and,<br />

thus, also be used by day to capture any motion (presence function).However, if it is<br />

necessary to activate a lamp in a certain area, such as roofed outside area with not much<br />

natural light, earlier than the other outside lamps, you can make use of the motion detector ’<br />

s own brightness function. Since the twilight function is already included in the input<br />

signal of the control channels, the channel function must be set to „Motion“.<br />

Twilight switch (10)<br />

The twilight switch consists of a combination device to display the current value (yellow bar)<br />

and the nominal value (red triangle) as well as the nominal value adjustment. The scale<br />

readings have been designed according to the expected value with up to 1000 lx. Each<br />

modification of the nominal or current value results in a new calculation of the output value,<br />

Page 137


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

which is given to the delay stage for further processing. The delay stage consists of a<br />

switch-off delay, which can be adjusted by means of the rotary regulator (11) from 0..900<br />

seconds. With active twilight (12), the current remaining time in % is indicated by a status<br />

LED the delay being active. Furthermore, the remaining time is also given as current text<br />

(13).<br />

Switch–off delay means: If outside brightness gets higher than the set nominal value, the<br />

twilight switch will switch off and, thus, the respective connected outside lighting channels<br />

will switch off as well. However, this only happens later after completion of the delay time. If<br />

brightness falls below the set nominal value, the outside lighting channels assigned in the<br />

matrix are switched on at once.<br />

with the switch-off delay brightness fluctuations (dark clouds etc.) are efficiently<br />

compensated. The LED bar (12) indicates the current status of the delay. The LED (12)<br />

shows the output status of the delay stage. Its output status corresponds to the signal that<br />

all control channels receive as signal „Twilight“ for further processing. The current delay is<br />

shown by switched on LED’s in the LED row. The switched on LED’s give the remaining time<br />

in %. Under (13) the remaining time is shown as text.<br />

If a user/owner has chosen the slightly cheaper version with a simple (1 Bit) or conventional<br />

twilight switch to be connected to a binary input, the system also includes this option. Here,<br />

we have to work without the luxury to parameterise the brightness limit. The delay stage<br />

remains but the limit must be set as fixed using the ETS.<br />

Tools to use the matrix (14)<br />

Because of the complex adjustment options, we have integrated a scenery memory for the<br />

matrix (04)(05)(06)(08), to protect its standard settings from unintentional modifications<br />

or to load temporary modification with the standard matrix again.<br />

The following options are provided:<br />

"Reset" of the matrix table (empty the matrix table), "Save" the matrix table (stores all<br />

current settings), "Load" the matrix table(loads ("Save") the matrix data stored last, "Panic"<br />

(Man. release of the panic function at the outputs 1-10, basically, an existing or future <strong>EIB</strong><br />

alarm system matrix responds to this function)<br />

The function influences the following matrix components:<br />

(04) Function definition of the control channels "Timer clock/Twilight", can be switched over<br />

by pressing the key: "Permanent Off", "Permanent On", "Timer clock-controlled",<br />

"Twilight-controlled", "Timer clock and twilight-controlled"<br />

(05) Function definition of the control channels "Motion detector", can be switched over by<br />

pressing the key: „Motion“, „Motion + Twilight sensor“, „Motion + Twilight sensor of the<br />

motion detector“ and „OFF“<br />

(06) Function matrix to assign the outside lighting channels to the function definitions<br />

(08) Operating mode switch of the outside lighting channels 1-10, can be switched over by<br />

pressing the key: „Automatic“, „Manual ON“, „Manual OFF“ and „No function“<br />

Page 138


Additional technical information:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Under „Sensor system toolbar“ you can also adjust whether the cyclical signal of a sensor is<br />

to be monitored (see also „Sensor system toolbar“). If the set monitoring time is exceeded,<br />

the status of the respective sensor channel reports a malfunction. If there is a malfunction of<br />

the sensor selected in the matrix, a measured value of 0 lx is indicated and processed (i.e.<br />

anyway it is "too dark" and the respective outside lights should go on) and the display (11)<br />

shows „Sensor malfunction“. If you now use the sensor selection to choose a functioning<br />

sensor, its measured values as well as malfunction status will be displayed and processed.<br />

Furthermore, it should be considered that all measured values have the same base, see<br />

„Sensor system Toolbar“<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 139


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Outside lighting matrix<br />

Within the project planning software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group<br />

addresses can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list outside lighting matrix:<br />

Module AB001:<br />

Inputs:<br />

Page 140


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

5 pc. inputs, motion detector:<br />

Module name: AB001<br />

Name communication object: AUB BM1 - AUB BM5<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Panic key (to be connected to panic functions, e.g. alarm system):<br />

1 pc. input/output, panic key:<br />

Module name: AB001<br />

Name communication object: Panik<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Outputs:<br />

Outside lighting channels (1-10) and timer clock channels for automatic operating mode<br />

change-over:<br />

Page 141


10 pc. outputs, outside lighting channels:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: AB001<br />

Name communication object: AUB Leuchte 1 - AUB Leuchte 10<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

10 pc. Outputs Timer clock channels operating mode change-over:<br />

Module name: AB001<br />

Name communication object: AUB Leuchte 1 BAext - AUB Leuchte 10 BAext<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14.000 (1 Byte)<br />

Sensors:<br />

You will find the available <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> inputs (sensors) on the page "Sensor system toolbar"<br />

under "<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list".<br />

Hint:<br />

If you want to use the timer clock outputs (delivery condition "virtual", that is internal data<br />

points) of the programmes 1-4 (02) also for processing on the <strong>EIB</strong>, do not forget to activate<br />

the <strong>EIB</strong> Port "Connection" for this data point first. When output on the <strong>EIB</strong> is activated for<br />

this data point, a group address must be entered and a recipient must exist in the <strong>EIB</strong><br />

system (key or similar) to acknowledge the telegrams. If there is no recipient, the timer<br />

clock is always switched off.<br />

For <strong>EIB</strong> output the "Type" must be set to "<strong>EIB</strong> Schalter" or "<strong>EIB</strong> Schalter CO" (each action is<br />

sent), the "Port" must be set to "<strong>EIB</strong>" and under "Address" there must be an <strong>EIB</strong> group<br />

address (must absolutely be present in the system when used!).<br />

Page 142


Condition when delivered<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 143


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Operating Console<br />

Operating Console & Presence Simulation<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 144


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Operating Console & Presence Simulation<br />

The operating terminal permits direct operation, display and control of a maximum of 80 pcs.<br />

switchable (1Bit) devices (lamps, sockets etc.) and 6 pcs. dimmable devices (1Byte) by<br />

means of a push-button switch/rotary regulator, timer clock or presence simulation<br />

programme. With its central and clear display up to 40 switching groups can be operated per<br />

page. Using a navigation arrow you can jump to the next page to administrate the other 40<br />

switching groups or dimmable lighting groups.<br />

In a high-quality one-family house with <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>, depending on its size (100m² to 300m²),<br />

an average of approx. 300-500 data points (group addresses) are processed during the<br />

visualization. About 40-80 of these group addresses are required for indirect, local switching<br />

actions (lighting, sockets etc.).<br />

The operating terminal with presence simulation can be applied to carry out certain switching<br />

actions, to display the current situation or to integrate automatic functions. The presence<br />

simulations simulates usual activities in your house while you are absent to protect your<br />

property from potential burglars.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 145


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Operating Console & Presence Simulation<br />

Direct operation, display and control of max. 80 pcs. switchable (1Bit) devices (lights,<br />

sockets etc.) by means of push-button switch, timer clock or presence simulation programme<br />

with the following functions:<br />

� Operation and status display for 80 switchable outputs (lights/sockets etc.)<br />

� Operation and status display for 6 dimmable outputs<br />

� All dimmable and 8 defined switchable groups are integrated in the scenario manager<br />

with 8 scenes<br />

� A clock channel is assigned to each switching channel that can be activated in the special<br />

program >presence simulation<<br />

� The clock channels of the dimmable outputs are also dimmable<br />

� Each of the 80 switching and 6 dimming groups disposes of its own time switch program<br />

� Here, different operating modes can be activated, e.g. the presence simulation with freely<br />

editable switching dates and activities.<br />

� Once parameterized, the presence simulation program can be started automatically when<br />

you are away (holidays etc.) and acts according to your instructions only. It is also<br />

possible to provide other specific programs according to your wishes and requirements.<br />

� User-defined labelling of the switching outputs<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 146


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Operating Console & Presence Simulation<br />

There are no specific requirements to use this module. There must only be switchable (1Bit)<br />

devices, controlled by switching actuators (binary outputs) in your <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> facility.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

8-fold switch actuator <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> SA.8.16,<br />

MDRC, (6x16A man., 2x8A)<br />

Ref. No.: N000200<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT<br />

Very high quality and unique price-/ performance relationship!<br />

The binary actuator SA.8.16 receives data frames via <strong>EIB</strong> and, with its potential-free,<br />

independent relay contacts, switches up to 10 groups of electric devices. Different outer<br />

conductors can be connected to the outputs A1-A6. The channels A1-A6 contain polarized<br />

latching relays (for capacitive load up to max. 140 µF and lamp load up to max. 2500<br />

W, further details see data sheet relay).One outer conductor each can be connected to<br />

the outputs A7 and A8. The channels A7 and A8 dispose of a change-over contact each<br />

(Opener/Closer).<br />

Comprehensive functions permit several possibilities for parmeterization, such as:<br />

� Switching behaviour of the relays (Open/Close)<br />

� Operating mode of the relays (switching, switching with feedback)<br />

� Definition of switching condition in case of bus failure and recovery<br />

(unchanged/open/closed)<br />

Page 147


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

� Characteristics of the feedback objects (Status, Send, Inverting)<br />

� Logical connections (AND, OR)<br />

� Inverting the connected object (Yes/No)<br />

� Definition of the input objects for bus voltage recovery (logical "0", "1" or read "via <strong>EIB</strong>")<br />

� Time function On and/or switch-off delay<br />

� Time function staircase lighting (retriggerable) with optional switch-off warning<br />

and service function (Cleaning light)<br />

� Time function staircase lighting with abort option by means of "0" frames<br />

(for currently active time function)<br />

� etc.<br />

Using the slide switches 6 relays (output 1-6) can be switched on or off directly by hand<br />

parallel to <strong>EIB</strong>, <strong>KNX</strong> TP1 or even without <strong>EIB</strong>, <strong>KNX</strong> TP1. In addition to that, these slide<br />

switches serve to show the current switch position. The 8-fold binary actuator SA.8.16 is a<br />

device to be fixed on a 35mm DIN-bar and to be installed in electric distributors. In<br />

combination with the product database and the ETS-Software the actuator serves to switch<br />

up to 10 independent groups of electric devices with different functions each. Several<br />

different software settings permit application of logical connections, switch-on and off delays<br />

and staircase lighting functions with adjustable switch-off warning. Besides the option to<br />

switch the connected devices in a defined way in case of a bus malfunction, it is possible to<br />

update the current object values in case of a bus recovery. Power supply of the device is<br />

provided exclusively via the <strong>EIB</strong>, no other power supply is required. Connection to the<br />

bus (<strong>EIB</strong>, <strong>KNX</strong> TP1) is ensured by means of the supplied bus terminal. Connection of the<br />

devices is ensured by means of integrated screw terminals. The outputs A1 to A6 are capable<br />

of switching loads with a current of up to 16 A by means of potential-free contacts. Using the<br />

switch position displays of the outputs A1 to A6 it is also possible to switch the connected<br />

load circuits manually - even in case of bus failure. The outputs A7 and A8 switch loads with<br />

a current of max. 8 A. Doing so, two groups of devices each can be switched potential-free<br />

with one opener and one closer. (change-over contact).<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> basic set 64 channel, incl. logic module<br />

and power supply<br />

Ref. No.: e160<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT<br />

The basic set has been designed for basic equipment with the most important<br />

components at a reasonable price!<br />

The basic kit can be programmed very normally with the ETS2 and ETS3 PRO.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> basic set 1 plus consists of:<br />

Page 148


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

1 pc. Power supply unit with throttle,<br />

1 pc. Power supply unit to supply the interface modules,<br />

2 pcs. Universal input and output concentrator 32-fold <strong>EIB</strong> (<strong>EIB</strong>-Interface),<br />

"n" pcs. Binary outputs 8-fold 230V,manual operation, RM, 16A/10A,<br />

"n" pcs. Binary inputs 8-fold 24V-AC/DC,<br />

"n" pcs. Binary inputs 8-fold 230V-AC,<br />

2 pcs. Connecting lines VL-1 (to connect the interface modules with the concentrator)<br />

1 pcs. Logic modul (For complex control functions.)<br />

8 pcs. Connecting comb 8-fold<br />

Info:<br />

With this set you dispose of hardware to install a complete <strong>EIB</strong> line as well as the above<br />

delivery volume. The package includes 64 pcs. channels to operate devices (lamps, sockets,<br />

heating valves etc.), or 64 pcs. channels as bus inputs (window contacts, malfunction<br />

indicators, push-buttons etc.), or a mixed configuration of binary inputs and binary outputs<br />

because from now on you can determine yourself the type and quantity of binary inputs<br />

8-fold or binary outputs 8-fold you require without any extra costs.<br />

Universal Dimming actuator<br />

2-fold, MDRC<br />

Ref. No.: N167607<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: JUNG<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 3602REG<br />

The universal dimming actuator receives telegrams for switching or dimming purposes. It<br />

can work with the principle of trailing or leading edge control. That means either low voltage<br />

halogen lamps with TRONIC transformer or conventional (inductive) transformer can be<br />

controlled. The max. capacity can be extended by using power amplifiers (see main<br />

catalogue).Depending on the parameter it is possible to activate various additional functions.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 149


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Operating Console & Presence Simulation<br />

The surface of the operating terminal consists of several operating pages (Module LI001 &<br />

LI001_D as well as LI002), whereas the modules LI001 % LI002 consist of 40 pcs. keys with<br />

assigned LED, label text and separate timer clock programme as well as presence simulation.<br />

The dimmable lighting groups are assigned to the module LI001_D.<br />

(01) Texts describing the individual switching groups<br />

(02) Key with status LED for the respective switching group<br />

(03) This switching group (special colour) is included as additional function in the scenery<br />

control (Scenario Manager).<br />

(04) Additional advice<br />

(05) Calling the timer clock channels for lighting groups 01-40, incl. presence simulation<br />

(06) Calling the timer clock channels for lighting groups 41-80, incl. presence simulation<br />

(07) Navigation link to the next module page with the switching groups 41-80<br />

(08) User-defined labelling<br />

(09) Display of the current system time & date<br />

(10) Module designation for internal projects (designation is used in the database for quick<br />

identification)<br />

(11) Information about the current page<br />

(12) Navigation link main menu (button being pressed with active, flashing white LED<br />

below, if selected, our example " Lighting")<br />

(13) Navigation link submenu switchable and dimmable lighting groups<br />

(button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our<br />

example "Operating terminal & presence simulation")<br />

(14) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

The function to operate the push-button switches is self-explanatory. The push-button<br />

switches are designed in "ON/OFF" function. That means pressing the push-button switch<br />

reverses the previously active condition. Press "On", press "Off", Press "On" ... and so on.<br />

When delivered, the group addresses are read by each switching group as soon as the page<br />

is called (demand) to give the real facility condition. To control an additional switching group<br />

by the timer clock, the respective timer clock must be called (05, 06). In the timer clock<br />

programme (05) the channels of the switching groups 01-40 and in the timer clock<br />

programme (06) the channels 41-80 are provided (This programme is also applied to select<br />

and activate the presence simulation for the respective channel). The presence simulation<br />

events must be defined once for the whole day. To start (e.g. holidays or longer absence)<br />

this specific programme is simply activated using the menu point "Select time programme".<br />

Starting from this time, normal timer clock programmes are inactive for all switching groups.<br />

Only the simulation programmes are valid.<br />

Page 150


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 151


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The assigned channel names in the timer clock programmes can be changed by means of the<br />

project software (data point text). They are not taken over automatically via the label editor.<br />

This refers to all timer clock programmes.<br />

Page 152


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 153


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 154


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Operating Console & Presence Simulation<br />

Within the project planning software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group<br />

addresses can be used, whereas you may enter several group addresses. The "sending"<br />

address is always the first address. Separation is achieved with a semicolon ";".<br />

Page 155


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> point list operating console & presence<br />

simulation:<br />

Module LI001 - LI0002:<br />

When supplied, group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

As a standard, it is always the first group address that is read on "Demand" (page call) or<br />

"Running -up" (server start). However, if for example an assigned feedback address is to be<br />

read, a ">" sign must be set. In this specific case the second group address is read instead<br />

of the „sending“ address:<br />

Page 156


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

40 pcs. outputs with status LED & clock programme module LI001:<br />

Module name: LI001<br />

Name communication object: Leuchte S01 - Leuchte S40<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

40 pcs. outputs with status LED & timer clock programme module LI002:<br />

Module name: LI002<br />

Page 157


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Name communication object: Leuchte S41 - Leuchte S80<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 158


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Reminder function<br />

Reminder function<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 159


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Reminder function<br />

The integrated reminder editor serves to show recurring actions. This could be any reminder<br />

that is important to you. The reminder editor manages max. 10 reminder texts. A free text<br />

as well as a year timer clock with the respective date definition is assigned to each reminder.<br />

When the reminder date is reached, a message (new window) appears showing your<br />

personal text.<br />

W hen ©IQHOME.NET is applied on a touch screen monitor (e.g. wall installation), such a<br />

reminder can be viewed immediately by everyone. As an option it is also possible to give the<br />

reminder text as a spoken text (Elvis Tel programme extension module required) by means<br />

of the sound board and perhaps to transmit this message to an existing sound system in the<br />

house (example WHD).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 160


Message of 10 arbitrary reminders:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Reminder function<br />

� 10 channel reminder editor<br />

� A free reminder text is assigned to each reminder<br />

� A year time switch is assigned to each reminder to permit date definition<br />

� In the editor, a test button for manual date release is assigned to each reminder<br />

� Automatically generated message window (New Window) when reminder date(s) is/are<br />

reached<br />

� Active reminders are shown in the reminder window with time and date stamp<br />

� Using the button you can browse through several active reminders<br />

� Automatic linking to the previous active visualization page after acknowledgement of the<br />

last active reminder<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 161


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Reminder function<br />

There are no other requirements to use this module since this module does not require any<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> hardware. Only when the data points are activated as <strong>EIB</strong> Port, the reminders are<br />

also sent as <strong>EIB</strong> telegram on the bus. In this case you will need a "recipient" in your bus<br />

system. When delivered the memory editor data points are "virtually" pre-adjusted, i.e. they<br />

are not given on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> but processed within the visualization. It goes without saying<br />

that the operating terminal (visualization) must have been started to use its functions<br />

(message windows display).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 162


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Reminder function<br />

The surface of the reminder editor consists of an operating page (Module EE001) with an<br />

additional window (message window) that pops up automatically as soon as the defined date<br />

has been reached.<br />

(01) Reminder channels<br />

(02) Freely definable reminder text (can be edited by clicking on the text field)<br />

(03) Test button for manual release of a date and display<br />

(04) 10 channel year timer clock to fix a date<br />

(05) User-defined labelling 01<br />

(06) User-defined labelling 02<br />

(07) Display of the current system time and date<br />

(08) Module designations for internal project planning<br />

(designation is used in the database for quick identification)<br />

(09) Navigation link main menu<br />

(button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our<br />

example "Tools")<br />

(10) Navigation link submenu lighting tools<br />

(button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our<br />

example "Reminder editor")<br />

(11) Navigation link back to tool submenu<br />

(12) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

(13) The label editor has been activated, all texts that can be modified are marked yellow.<br />

Click to edit these texts.<br />

(14) ditto (13)<br />

(15) ditto (13)<br />

(16) Time programme of the 10-channel year timer clock<br />

(17) Display of the individual reminder channels<br />

(18) Time frame of a reminder<br />

(19) Definition of a reminder date<br />

(20) Year timer clock calendar<br />

(21) Comprehensive tools of the timer clock<br />

(22) Export function of the dates (*.csv-file)<br />

(23) Automatic message window with your personal reminder text<br />

(24) Automatic message window with time and date stamp for reminder<br />

(25) Automatic message window with acknowledgement button for active reminders<br />

Page 163


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 164


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The reminder editor (10) is used to define the personal texts (02) and the respective<br />

reminder dates (04). To enter text you must go into the label editor (12). Here, in addition<br />

to the reminder texts (14) the other module labels that can be edited are marked yellow<br />

(13). All yellow texts can be modified by a simple mouse click.<br />

Click within the text to open a work box (14)(15) with the current text. Now, the text can<br />

be modified as you like within the maximum given length.<br />

Page 165


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Use the button (15) to confirm or quit the text. After having completed the text, use<br />

the "Back" button in the visualization page submenu to return to the reminder editor.<br />

Now, the changes you have just made are displayed. After having defined the reminder<br />

texts, it is now necessary to fix the reminder dates by means of the integrated 10-channel<br />

year timer clock (04). Do not forget that only "On" ("1") dates (18)(19) must be used to<br />

fix dates. Otherwise reminders might be reset without acknowledgement. Now, enter into the<br />

timer clock all reminder dates (17) in the calendar (20) together with the desired reminder<br />

time (19) by entering an "On" command.<br />

If the reminder date is reached and the operating terminal has been started (visualization), a<br />

message window pops up showing the current reminder (23) (your text) as well as the date<br />

and time stamp (24) of the reminder day. Use the button (25) to acknowledge the<br />

message and to set it internally to "Off" ("0"). Should there be more messages, these are<br />

Page 166


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

displayed one after the other (using the button) with their reminder text and the date<br />

and time stamp.<br />

If there is no other reminder, the following text appears: "No more reminder is active!<br />

Back through button." (23) By pressing the button (25) again you return<br />

automatically to your last active visualization page. The message window does not dispose of<br />

a navigation bar to view and acknowledge the reminder intentionally. If the server or the<br />

operating terminal were not on at the reminder time the reminder window will automatically<br />

appear as soon as server or operating terminal are started.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 167


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Reminder function<br />

Within the project software a two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation can be used for the<br />

group addresses.<br />

When delivered, the data points of the reminder editor are "virtually" preset,<br />

that means they are not given on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> but only processed within the visualization.<br />

Only when data points are activated as <strong>EIB</strong> port (connection) and a group address is given<br />

(address) the reminders are sent as <strong>EIB</strong> telegram on the <strong>EIB</strong>.<br />

Page 168


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 169


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 170


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

The blind automatics in the ©IQHOME.NET visualization controls automatically (per side) the<br />

position of your blinds or shutters depending on brightness and timer clock programme (year<br />

timer clock). Comprehensive parameters permit individual adjustments to your building<br />

requirements without additional efforts and programming!<br />

The automatic blind control serves as fully automatic control of shading facilities with up to 4<br />

independent blind groups. Basically, these are assigned to the four directions but can also be<br />

used in other versions (such as 3 x blind, 1 x awning). This is permitted by the freely<br />

definable dependencies (sensor selection), nominal values (limit value, slat height and slat<br />

angle) as well as the integrated 4- channel timer clock.<br />

The devices of your <strong>EIB</strong> system (blind actuators, blind push-button switches) have already<br />

been provided with a certain „intelligence“ by the manufacturers which is completely<br />

sufficient for a normal „on site“ operation. You can very often realize efficient automatic<br />

processes with these devices. However, control options and parameterisation of this facility<br />

are limited. Setting new parameters is difficult (brightness values, slat height and slat angle<br />

etc.) and can sometimes only be carried out by means of ETS. This can only be done by a<br />

superior control that disposes of the required „intelligence“ on the one hand and a (e.g.<br />

visual) user interface on the other.<br />

The ©IQHOME.NET 4-side blind automatics consists of 4 operating pages for one blind side<br />

each. Each module is clearly identified within the project and the following description:<br />

Blind side 1 (East)<br />

Example: Module JA001<br />

The blind automatics control the blinds, if necessary parallel to a possibly existing decentral<br />

on-site control, to avoid overheating of rooms by intensive sunshine (especially when owner<br />

is absent) or to go automatically into comfort positions.<br />

Precondition for the use of the ©IQHOME.NET 4-side blind automatics is at least one <strong>EIB</strong><br />

(2Byte) brightness sensor! Generally, this is backed by all weather stations.<br />

All other components such as parameter memory, limit value switch, timer clock are<br />

integrated in the software. Apart from 1Byte communication objects for slat height/slat angle<br />

or a 1Bit preset positioning object there are no other special requirements on the applied<br />

blind actuators.<br />

Page 171


Note:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The ©IQHOME.NET 4-side blinds automatics is based on an existing and correctly functioning<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> blind facility. A single operation is not part of this blind automatics. Safety functions<br />

(wind, rain, freezing point etc) have to be provided as usual (<strong>EIB</strong> weather station actuator).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 172


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

Control of up to 4 different blind groups with the following functions per side (direction):<br />

� 4- side blind automatics for brightness-controlled shading<br />

� Each side can be parameterized separately<br />

� Each side disposes of a separate operating mode selection<br />

� Time switch control release for each side (direction)<br />

� Sensor selection out of 6 available sensor inputs (brightness)<br />

� Display of the brightness value by the selected sensor<br />

� Switching point of the brightness value<br />

� Variable switch-on and off delay in limit value situation<br />

� Remaining time display of the delays<br />

� Adjustable blind position (segment height, segment angle)<br />

� Status display of the control outputs (segment height, segment angle)<br />

� User-defined labelling of the sides<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 173


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

The control requires the application of at least one <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> brightness sensor. All other<br />

component such as parameter memory, limit value switch, timer clock are integrated in the<br />

software. There are no special requirements on the blind actuators used. Apart from the<br />

usually applied actuators with „Byte“- objects for position control you may also use<br />

actuators with „Preset“- control (Bit positioning) in the system. However, in the latter case<br />

you would not be able to use the comfortable position adjustments by means of<br />

©IQHOME.NET. These must then be defined in the actuator by means of the ETS as fixed<br />

values (modification of slat height and slat itself can then only be made with the ETS).<br />

As an option up to 4 other measured brightness values can be processed in ©IQHOME.NET<br />

for example to control each side with its own sensor. Each blind front has a selection box<br />

(Drp Down) with the available brightness values to calculate the control. However, the blind<br />

automatics is also able to control all sides of a building with only one brightness sensor. For<br />

this purpose separate limit values and blind timer clocks are provided to define an individual<br />

release of the different sides.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

blind actuator 230 V AC, 6 A<br />

with "local control", 8-fold and 1Byte<br />

position objects for segment height, segment angle<br />

Ref. No.: N164408<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: BUSCH/JAEGER<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 6196/82<br />

To control 8 independent drives. Separate locking (UP position) e.g. possible using W ind<br />

Watchdog Without additional voltage supply The following applications are provided for the<br />

outputs: Outputs: Blind, Position, Security function, W ind alarm, Rain alarm, Frost alarm,<br />

Automatic sun protection, Automatic heating/cooling, Status, Position check-back signal,<br />

Scenes, Ventilation-flap operation, Run to pre-set and set, "local operation" Connections:<br />

Page 174


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Outputs: screw terminals, 0.2 - 4.0 mm² multiple-wire: 0.2 -2.5 mm² <strong>EIB</strong>-line: Bus terminal<br />

Dimensions: (L x W x D): 90 mm x 72 mm x 64 mm Installation depth: 68 mm module<br />

width: 8 TE Design: per M-Design Technical data: Rated voltage: 230 V~, +10 % / -15 %<br />

Rated frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz Outputs: 8, Change-over switch Switching capacity:<br />

AC1/AC3 Rated current: 6 A Physical properties: Protection class (Device): IP 20<br />

Temperature range (Device): -5 °C - 45 °C<br />

Description<br />

Weather station <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

Ref. No.: N300057<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: THEBEN<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 132 9 200<br />

• Records wind speed, rain, brightness and temperature<br />

• The measured variables can be transmitted directly on the bus.<br />

• Wind speed, brightness, temperature are transmitted as values, rain as 1 bit<br />

• Wind speed can be transmitted either in m/s or km/h<br />

• The data are evaluated in the device itself<br />

• Powered from bus voltage, 230 V are required if rain sensors are used<br />

• Brightness range 1–100,000 lux<br />

• Temperature range –20 °C ... +55 °C<br />

• 4 universal channels (AND linked)<br />

• 3 sun protection channels (specifically for blind and shutter application)<br />

• A teach-in feature for the brightness threshold is available. It enables thresholds to be set<br />

retrospectively by the push of a button without the device having to be reconfigured.<br />

• Integrated bus coupler<br />

• Integrated heater for rain sensor<br />

• Automated sun protection mechanism for independent control of blind, awning etc.<br />

• The teach-in features are user-friendly and enable the customer to retrospectively define<br />

the threshold with the touch of a button. This does not require the weather station to be<br />

re-configured.<br />

• The automated sun protection mechanism independently controls the blind<br />

(shutter/awning) during the day, no manual intervention necessary. When a threshold is<br />

reached, two separate messages can be sent, e.g. for height and slat of a blind or a value<br />

and switching message.<br />

• The different channels can have any configuration<br />

Benefits<br />

• The only <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> weather station that records and evaluates all variables in one housing.<br />

• Device is connected directly to the bus, no other cables need be laid.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 175


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Page 176


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

The surface of the blind control consists of four operating pages (Module JA001-JA004), with<br />

one page being assigned to each blind group (side).<br />

(01) Sensor selection brightness<br />

(02) Current value display with limit value regulator<br />

(03) Switch to activate/deactivate the automatic function<br />

(04) Manual operation of the clock channel<br />

(05) Adjustment of the switch-on delay (EVZ 0-1800s) when limit value is exceeded<br />

(brightness) with remaining time display in % when delay is active<br />

(06) Adjustment of the switch-off delay (AVZ 0-1800s) when limit value is fallen short of<br />

(brightness) with remaining time display in % when delay is active<br />

(07) Adjustment of the slat height for active shading depending on<br />

automatic programme<br />

(08) Slat angle adjustment for active shading depending on<br />

automatic programme<br />

(09) Information display with status display for limit value situation with remaining time<br />

display in seconds, sensor malfunction etc.<br />

(10) Status information about currently calculated output status of the automatics for slat<br />

height (symbol display at one window)<br />

(11) Status information about currently calculated output status of the automatics for slat<br />

angle<br />

(12) Status information about current positioning<br />

(sun = positioning is active, positioning commands have been sent to the actuators)<br />

(13) Display of the current system time & date<br />

(14) Module designation for internal projects<br />

(designation is used in the database for quick identification)<br />

(15) Internal control cycle<br />

(16) User-defined labelling of the blind side<br />

(17) Current side selection blind control<br />

(18) Current value display in klux of the active (01) brightness sensor<br />

(19) Calling up the Online-help (base menu)<br />

(20) Navigation link to start page (base menu)<br />

(21) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

(22) Navigation link main menu blind<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected,<br />

our example "Blind")<br />

(23) Navigation link submenu blind 01<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected,<br />

our example "East")<br />

(24) Navigation link submenu blind 02 (Example West)<br />

(25) Navigation link submenu blind 03 (Example South)<br />

(26) Navigation link submenu blind 04 (Example North)<br />

(27) Calling the clock programme for the blind automatics<br />

(28) Navigation link to sensor system toolbar (sensor definition)<br />

Page 177


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The brightness limit values for each side can be set individually by means of the red limit<br />

value regulator (02) of the module. To do so, simply push the limit value regulator to the<br />

desired value (given in klx). The yellow display bar represents the current brightness value<br />

in klx. Another individual adjustment of the limit value can be made by setting a switch-on<br />

or off delay between 0-900 sec. to avoid that the blinds open or close as soon as there are a<br />

few clouds.<br />

Individual input values (brightness sensors) can be used for each side. Selection is made<br />

using the Drop Down Menu (01). Thus, it is also possible to control all sides with only one<br />

brightness value.<br />

Furthermore, each side disposes of its own timer clock channel in the blind timer clock that<br />

can be called up using the clock symbol (27).<br />

The automatic function of each side is activated or deactivated by means of the button „ Auto<br />

“ (03). The desired blind or shutter positioning that means which slat height and which slat<br />

angle (blinds only) has to be realized with the active automatic function is set by means of<br />

the rotary regulators (07, 08). There is a rotary regulator for the slat height ([07] 0% =<br />

completely up, 100% = completely down) and one for the slat angle ([08] 0° = horizontal<br />

slat, 90° = vertical slat, i.e. closed). Switching off the automatic function using the button „<br />

Auto“ (03) with the positioning being active does not immediately lead to an opening<br />

(quitting the positioning). Only after the brightness value has fallen below the limit value<br />

(brightness) including a possibly existing switch-off delay or after the clock has switched off,<br />

the current positioning is deactivated. Only when the limit value is exceeded the next time<br />

Page 178


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

with the automatics being inactive (button „Auto“ (03) is off ) this will not lead to a<br />

positioning.<br />

The following conditions must be fulfilled to permit a transmission of positioning commands<br />

to the blind actuators:<br />

1. The brightness limit must have been exceeded at the respective side. (02)<br />

(A possibly adjusted delay time must have been completed. EVZ [05])<br />

2. The blind automatics for the respective side must have been switched on. (03)<br />

3. The clock for the respective side must be on (Time programme must be active).<br />

(27, 04)<br />

Note:<br />

Output of the positioning commands (group addresses) is not cyclical but occurs<br />

only when the limit value situation changes to avoid a constant closing and opening<br />

of the blinds through the positioning process.<br />

Using an existing local blind push button you can make adjustments at any time. The<br />

behaviour of the applied blind actuators in case of positioning/automatic commands (direct<br />

movement from any position into the position parameterised in the ©IQHOME.NET for<br />

height/slat or reference movement or movement always directly from top or bottom etc.) is<br />

set at the actuators by means of the ETS.<br />

Additional technical information:<br />

If your blind actuators do not dispose of <strong>EIB</strong> communication objects of the 1Byte type for<br />

slat height (runtime) and 1Byte type for the slat itself, nominal positioning values cannot be<br />

set by means of ©IQHOME.NET. In this case, the positions must be set directly by means of<br />

the actuator as fixed values i.e. slat height and slat itself can only be modified by means of<br />

the ETS. Such actuators usually have an <strong>EIB</strong> communication object of the 1Bit (PRESET) type<br />

to start/finish the positioning at the blind actuator. This 1Bit data point is also integrated in<br />

this blind terminal and is sent on the bus when positioning is being carried out (see <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

data).<br />

Hint:<br />

When adjusting the motor running times at the blind actuator you will have to observe the<br />

exact blind running times for one movement (is often parameterised in seconds per output at<br />

actuator) since slat adjustment is only made after motor running time is off (long-time<br />

movement, slat height) at the actuator. If, for example, the motor running time is set longer<br />

than the time required for the blind/shutter to move down, this leads to an unintentional<br />

darkening (The blinds usually go down with the slats being closed (90° vertical) and up with<br />

the slats being open) of the room before the slat can move into the set position.<br />

Sensor selection (1)<br />

Depending on your existing <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> project, up to a maximum of 4 direction-dependant<br />

brightness sensor (at the sides) or other sensors can be integrated. All sensors can serve as<br />

input value for the limit value switch. The respective selection is made with the sensor<br />

selection. The sensors defined in the “Sensor system toolbar” are presented for selection.<br />

The current measured value of the selected sensor is displayed together with the measuring<br />

Page 179


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

instrument (18). A sensor monitoring set in the sensor system toolbar is also active here<br />

since sensors with a malfunction are set to zero by the system (0 klux/lux measured value<br />

means „too dark“, meaning blind „up“). The malfunction of the selected sensor is indicated<br />

by a flashing red display (09).<br />

Limit value switch (2)<br />

The limit value switch consists of a combination device to display the current value (yellow<br />

bar) and the nominal value (red triangle) as well as the nominal value adjustment. The scale<br />

readings have been designed according to the expected value with up to 1000 lx. Each<br />

modification of the nominal or current value result in a new calculation of the output value<br />

which is given to the delay stage for further processing. The delay stages consist of a<br />

switch-on and a switch-off delay (ON/OFF), that can be adjusted variably by means of the<br />

rotary regulators (5, 6) between 0..1800 seconds.<br />

Operating mode (3)<br />

It is used to activate or deactivate the automatic function. It is available for further<br />

processing on the <strong>EIB</strong> or can be influenced via the <strong>EIB</strong> , see "<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data".<br />

Manual operation timer clock (4)<br />

In normal operation, the timer clock is responsible for the release of its assigned blind group<br />

(e.g. blind south = 10 a.m. to 3 p.m.). If fast, temporary interventions are required, the<br />

switch (4) can be used to switch over the output of the clock (27). This can be reset by the<br />

user or is reset by the timer clock itself with the next programmed switching. As an option<br />

(project planning), this function is also available on the <strong>EIB</strong> for further processing or can be<br />

influenced via <strong>EIB</strong>, see "<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data". Here, it is important that the <strong>EIB</strong> port for this data<br />

point is activated since this data point is an internal (virtual) data point when delivered.<br />

When activating the <strong>EIB</strong> output for this data point, a group address must be entered and a<br />

recipient must exist in the <strong>EIB</strong> system (push button or similar) to acknowledge the<br />

telegrams. If there is no recipient, this leads to the clock being permanently switched off.<br />

Switch-on delay (ON) (5), Switch-off delay (OFF) (6)<br />

The switch-on delay fixed the time that must pass before the exceeding of the defined<br />

brightness limit leads to a release (switch on) of the positioning mechanisms. The switch-off<br />

delay fixes the time that must pass before the shortfall of the defined brightness limit leads<br />

to a blocking (switch off) of the positioning mechanisms. W ith this switch-off delay<br />

brightness fluctuations (clouds) are compensated efficiently.<br />

(Recommended adjustment: EVZ: 300 s, AVZ: 1800 s)<br />

Slat height (7), slat angle (8)<br />

Using these parameters the desired height and the slat angle to be realized during the<br />

positioning of a blind side can be fixed. For an inactive positioning height and slat angle are<br />

given with the value "0". The current output of the parameterised positioning commands is<br />

represented by a symbol window for height (10) with the slat angle position next to it (11).<br />

When the positioning is active, regulator adjustments are put on the bus immediately after<br />

release.<br />

For „Preset“- controlled blind actuators a positioning command (1 Bit) positioning = "1" is<br />

sent while positioning is in progress.<br />

The parameters height and slat angle are not important for „Preset“- controlled blind<br />

Page 180


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

actuators. Both actuator types can be used in the facility at the same time.<br />

Labelling the blind side (16)<br />

The label of the blind side only serves for user orientation. The label can be modified on<br />

another page that is called up with button (21).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 181


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

Within the project planning software, the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group<br />

addresses can be used.<br />

Page 182


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

©IQHOME.NET disposes of 8 pcs. 1Byte <strong>EIB</strong> communication objects and 4 pcs. 1Bit <strong>EIB</strong><br />

communication objects, per blind control module always 1 x for the height and 1 x for the<br />

slat angle as well as 1 x Preset positioning for blind actuators without 1Byte communication<br />

objects. You will find all other <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects under "<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data".<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 183


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA001<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list blind automatics side 1:<br />

Module JA001 (Example East):<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

Input, release/blocking automatic operation:<br />

Module name: JA001<br />

Name communication object: Jalo A Automatik<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA001<br />

Name communication object: Jalo A Pos Behang<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA001<br />

Name communication object: Jalo A Pos Lamelle<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command Preset:<br />

Module name: JA001<br />

Page 184


Name communication object: Jalo A Fahrt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 185


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA002<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list blind automatics side 2:<br />

Module JA002 (Example South):<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

Input, release/blocking automatic operation:<br />

Module name: JA002<br />

Name communication object: Jalo B Automatik<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA002<br />

Name communication object: Jalo B Pos Behang<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA002<br />

Name communication object: Jalo B Pos Lamelle<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command Preset:<br />

Module name: JA002<br />

Page 186


Name communication object: Jalo B Fahrt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 187


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA003<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list blind automatics side 3:<br />

Module JA003 (Example West):<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

Input, release/blocking automatic operation:<br />

Module name: JA003<br />

Name communication object: Jalo C Automatik<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA003<br />

Name communication object: Jalo C Pos Behang<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA003<br />

Name communication object: Jalo C Pos Lamelle<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command Preset:<br />

Module name: JA003<br />

Page 188


Name communication object: Jalo C Fahrt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 189


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA004<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list blind automatics side 4:<br />

Module JA004 (Example North):<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

Input, release/blocking automatic operation:<br />

Module name: JA004<br />

Name communication object: Jalo D Automatik<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA004<br />

Name communication object: Jalo D Pos Behang<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command height 0-100%:<br />

Module name: JA004<br />

Name communication object: Jalo D Pos Lamelle<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS14 Type 1Byte (<strong>EIB</strong> Zähler-8u)<br />

Output, positioning command Preset:<br />

Module name: JA004<br />

Page 190


Name communication object: Jalo D Fahrt<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS1 (1Bit)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 191


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Inputs<br />

4-Side blind automatics<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list sensor inputs:<br />

You will find the available <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> inputs (sensors) on the page "Sensor system toolbar"<br />

under "<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list". To use the ©IQHOME.NET 4-side blind automatics there<br />

must be at least 1 <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> brightness sensor in your facility and it must be connected with<br />

©IQHOME.NET by means of group addresses (see project planning advice).<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 192


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Climate Console<br />

Climate Console<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 193


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Climate Console<br />

The climate console serves for central administration, control and display of <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> single<br />

room temperature controllers as well as a heat generator with water treatment and <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

interface (e.g. Viessmann or Buderus). Using the climate console in ©IQHOME.NET all<br />

parameters of the individual rooms can be viewed and operating mode switch-over (1Byte)<br />

can be controlled comfortably with individual programmes. For this purpose, two<br />

visualization pages have been integrated, one page for a group of six rooms.<br />

Modify the heating curve of your heat generator (level/shape) and have all other important<br />

information displayed (hot water preparation, boiler), provided there is an optional interface,<br />

or expand your facility with a solar system (Professional Version). The comprehensive<br />

long-term history management permits to evaluate all relevant data in form of tables or<br />

graphics and to export the data for further use.<br />

When you are absent for a longer period of time, just enter the number of days you are not<br />

at home and that’s it. Now, the system regulates standby and night operation automatically.<br />

Hint (for users of Professional project planning with Iocomp control elements only):<br />

Simply copy a whole page, modify the data points in the event processing and select the new<br />

data points at the elements to integrate any number of temperature controllers. W ithin a<br />

few minutes you can create additional modules. However, it is essential that there is a<br />

licence for the required additional data points (group addresses) to create further group<br />

addresses for additional controllers.<br />

If you are not familiar with Professional version or do not have enough time to plan the<br />

project for your facility, we will be pleased to prepare your personal visualization. Just ask<br />

for your personal offer of under www.eibmarkt.com before you come to a decision.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 194


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Climate Console<br />

Administration and control of up to 12 room temperature controllers, heat generator and hot<br />

water generator with the following functions and features:<br />

� Status display (operating mode, desired and current temperature and control signal) of<br />

up to 12 room temperature regulators<br />

� Operating mode switch-over manual<br />

� Operating mode switch-over by means of individual time switch channels<br />

� Status display (operating mode, malfunction, desired and current temperature, heating<br />

curve, operating hours) of the heat generator (VIESSMAN interface, Buderus on demand)<br />

� Status display (switching conditions, malfunction, desired and current temperature) of<br />

the water supply system<br />

� Recording/history of operating mode, desired and current temperature and control signal<br />

of the room temperature regulators<br />

� Recording/history of desired and current temperature of heat generator and water supply<br />

system<br />

� Histories with different representation filters, variable time segments and print function<br />

� Set point adjustment at heat generator for holidays, level, curve behaviour (heating<br />

curve) and desired temperature of the water supply system<br />

� User-defined labelling of the room temperature regulators<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 195


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Climate Console<br />

If, for example, you do not integrate an interface with your heat generator, no heat<br />

generator or hot water generator data will be evaluated. But you will be able to manage the<br />

comprehensive information given by the single room temperature controllers. All <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

room temperature controllers with operating mode control (1Byte) and switching or steady<br />

control signal can be integrated (see data point list <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>). Older room temperature<br />

controllers do not dispose of a communication object of the 1Byte type but a separate Bit<br />

switch-over for the operating mode. This can be adapted in the Professional version by<br />

selecting a Bit-operating mode change-over switch. ©IQHOME.NET is best suited for the<br />

connection of the <strong>EIB</strong> Viessmann interface (Vitocom) but can also be parameterised for any<br />

other interface without any problems. (Professional version).<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

Room Controller <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

Ex. Room temperature controller with push buttons (<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Room Controller, GIRA, JUNG)<br />

Manufacturer: available from almost all manufacturers. Selection differs depending on<br />

customers’ wishes (design/function/price)<br />

Vitocom 200 (<strong>EIB</strong>)<br />

Page 196


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Ref. No.: N164334-1<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: VIESSMANN<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 7450539<br />

Gateway for the direct connection to the <strong>EIB</strong> of heating systems with Vitotronic 300 (type<br />

KW3), wall models Vitodens, Vitopend and Vitoplus with closed-loop regulation/control for<br />

weather run mode (with Comfortrol) and post-connected Vitotronic 050 (type HK1M) or<br />

Dekamatik system.<br />

Functions:<br />

� Remote control of heating systems e.g. switch, change set points ()<br />

� Remote monitoring of heating systems (e.g. desired/current temperature, heating curve,<br />

operating mode)<br />

� Passing of error or disturbing messages<br />

� Passing of data points of all bus users<br />

� Remote switch-over of the operating program over telephone (at regulation/control for<br />

wall models only with server Comfortrol)<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 197


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Climate Console<br />

(01) Terminal with display of room, operating mode switch, current (thermometer)<br />

and nominal value<br />

(arrow) temperature and control signal status (Bit or Byte)<br />

(02) Operating mode switch Comfort, Standby, Night, Frost (K, S, N, F)<br />

(03) Current and nominal value display room temperature<br />

(04) Display of the current valve status or controller result output as steady signal<br />

or switching signal<br />

(05) Timer clock programme call for automatically controlled operating mode switch-over<br />

of the room temperature controllers<br />

(06) Navigation link to the next page (rooms 07-12) of the climate console<br />

(07) Navigation link to history administration<br />

(08) Terminal: heat generator data<br />

(09) Terminal: influencing the heating curve<br />

(10) Additional parameter and status information of heat generator<br />

(11) Terminal: hot water generator<br />

(12) User-defined labelling of this active page of the climate Console by means<br />

of label editor (16)<br />

(13) Module designation for internal project planning (designation is used in the<br />

database for fast identification)<br />

(14) Navigation link main menu<br />

(button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected,<br />

our example "Climate")<br />

(15) Navigation link submenu climate<br />

(button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected,<br />

our example "Heating")<br />

(16) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

(17) Current climate console page selection<br />

Page 198


Room terminal (01)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

In the room terminal with its display of room name (01), operating mode switch (02),<br />

current (thermometer) and nominal value (red arrow) (03), temperature and control signal<br />

status (Bit or Byte) (04) all important data is indicated. With a mouse click the operating<br />

mode switch (02) can be set vertically to the different operating modes comfort operation,<br />

standby operation, night operation and frost protection. Using the integrated timer clock (05)<br />

these functions can also be controlled automatically. Thus, difficult and time-consuming<br />

parameterisations at the timer clock displays of room controllers are a thing of the past. In<br />

the timer clock programme (05) complete year or vacation programmes can be entered and<br />

standard programmes can be defined.<br />

Page 199


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The small red arrow (03) shows the current desired temperature you have set by means of<br />

ETS depending on the operating mode selected. The arrow varies in its horizontal scale<br />

reading and points to the current desired temperature in the thermometer display next to it.<br />

The thermometer itself shows the current temperature (03) of the room temperature<br />

controller. The LED displays (04) shows the current status of the heating valve or the<br />

nominal value output of the controller to the valve. Here, you can chose whether the<br />

switching output at the controller (1Bit) or the steady output (1Byte) is used, see also<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list of ©IQHOME.NET. If you use the switching output, the LED band only<br />

shows 0% or 100%. All this data (operating mode, valve status, nominal and current<br />

temperature) can be evaluated as table or graphics in the integrated history administration<br />

(07) and it can be exported.<br />

The controllers 07-12 are on the next page that can be called up by means of the navigation<br />

arrow (06) in the submenu.<br />

Heat generator and hot water generator (08)(09)(10)(11)<br />

With its Viessmann interface, ©IQHOME.NET is designed for the integration of different<br />

information.<br />

Page 200


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

(Example Viessmann interface with function module REG)<br />

Part of this are for example:<br />

In the heat generator data terminal the nominal temperature and the current temperature,<br />

the outside temperature, current malfunctions and pump data (08) are displayed. The<br />

nominal temperature input for the hot water generator can be modified by a simple mouse<br />

click in the text field.:<br />

Page 201


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

In the terminal for heating curve manipulation, level and heating curve shape (09) can be<br />

changed. Click on the text field to open a box for current value modification. After having<br />

entered the new value, this value is transmitted on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> via the interface to the heat<br />

generator.<br />

Heating curve acc. to DIN<br />

The heating curve describes the connection between outside temperature (TA) and heating<br />

feed temperature (TV).<br />

Heating curve shape (EF) (09)<br />

The heating curve shape defines the proportional connection between outside temperature<br />

(TA) and feed temperature (TV). This parameter is mostly used in cold seasons. An input of,<br />

for example, 1.3 means that in case of a outside temperature change of 1K the feed<br />

temperature is adapted by 3K.<br />

Heating curve level (KH) (09)<br />

Using the parameter „Level“ the curve can be displaced in parallel (Offset). This parameter is<br />

mostly used during in the inter-seasonal period.<br />

In the display for additional parameters and status information of the heat generator (10)<br />

current malfunctions are shown (operating condition) and the current operating time of the<br />

heat generator (operating hours* factor) can also be displayed. In the vacation day text field<br />

you may enter the number of days you are absent (vacation etc.) and the heat generator has<br />

to work with a minimum performance or with protection functions (frost protection). Click on<br />

the text field to open a box for current value modification. After having entered the new<br />

value, this value is transmitted on the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> via the interface to the heat generator.<br />

In the terminal for the hot water generation (11) nominal and current temperature of the<br />

hot water generator (boiler) are displayed together with current status information about<br />

pumps (circulation pump, charge pump,) and malfunctions.<br />

Page 202


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Each terminal page can be labelled individually (12). To do so, you have to call up the<br />

integrated label editor (16). In the label editor, all texts that can be edited are marked<br />

yellow. After having finished the labels, use the arrow key to return to the climate console.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 203


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Climate Console<br />

Within the project planning software the two-digit or the three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for<br />

group addresses can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list climate console:<br />

Module KL001-KL002:<br />

Room controller:<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

Page 204


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

06 pcs. Inputs Current temperature:<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: RTR01_Isttemperatur - RTR06_Isttemperatur<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

06 pcs. inputs, nominal temperature:<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: RTR01_Solltemperatur - RTR06_Solltemperatur<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

06 pcs. inputs, valve (signal steady):<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: RTR01_Ventil - RTR06_Ventil<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 6 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

06 pcs. inputs, valve (signal switching):<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Page 205


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Name communication object: RTR01_Ventil_S - RTR06_Ventil_S<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

06 pcs. inputs, current temperature:<br />

Module name: KL002<br />

Name communication object: RTR07_Isttemperatur - RTR12_Isttemperatur<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

06 pcs. inputs, Nominal temperature:<br />

Module name: KL002<br />

Name communication object: RTR07_Solltemperatur - RTR12_Solltemperatur<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

06 pcs. inputs, valve (signal steady):<br />

Module name: KL002<br />

Name communication object: RTR07_Ventil - RTR12_Ventil<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 6 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

06 pcs. inputs, valve (signal switching):<br />

Page 206


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: KL002<br />

Name communication object: RTR07_Ventil_S - RTR12_Ventil_S<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

Heat generator & hot water generator:<br />

10 pcs. inputs:<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WE_SM<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WE_Tist<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WE_Tsoll<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WE_UP<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WWB_Tist<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WWB_LP<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WWB_ZIP<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Page 207


Name communication object: HZG_WWB_E<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WWB_SM<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WWB_BS<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 10.000 (1Byte)<br />

04 pcs. outputs:<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WE_Neigung<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WE_Niveau<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WWB_Tsoll<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

Module name: KL001<br />

Name communication object: HZG_WWB_FE<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 10.000 (1Byte)<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 208


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Media Console<br />

Media Console<br />

Please select submenu...<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 209


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Scenario-Manager<br />

Scenario-Manager<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 210


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Scenario-Manager<br />

The scenario manager serves to store and call up to 8 scenes in which switching, dimming<br />

and blind conditions can be managed. Up to 8 switching channels (for example for lighting<br />

Off/No/On or blind Up/No/Down or Preset) or up to 6 dimming channels (set 1 Byte value,<br />

also suitable for long-time blind positioning (slat height)). The definition of the desired<br />

brightness value or switching condition in the individual scenes can be modified by means of<br />

the integrated rotary regulator and selector switch and can then be stored anew in a scene.<br />

To prevent unintentional overwriting of scenes, safety questions will be asked. Modified<br />

values are kept even with a new initialisation of the process server. The individual scenes are<br />

called using the integrated scene call keys or by means of telegrams sent, for example, by<br />

any push button switch (send value).<br />

The available communication objects for the outputs (binary outputs, dimmer) are provided<br />

in the module operating terminal (LI001).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 211


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Scenario-Manager<br />

The scenario manager serves to store and call up to 8 scenes with the following functions<br />

and features:<br />

� 8 scenes 6 dimming groups (Byte) and 8 switching groups (1Bit)<br />

� Function selection switching groups: Off/No/On<br />

� Function selection dimming groups: rotary-type regulator 0-100%<br />

� Special function „No“ also ideal for blind preset functions, thus no change in case of<br />

scene modification<br />

� 8-fold status-sensitive scene memory with security request<br />

� 8-fold scene activation internal and external by means of push button or motion detector<br />

(send value) possible<br />

� Automatic adoption of the scene names on the buttons „scene memory“ and „scene<br />

activation“<br />

� Display of the currently selected scenario<br />

� All functions in IQHOME.NET are persistent (adjustments are kept even when the server<br />

is shut down)<br />

� Individual labelling of the switching and dimming groups as well as scene names by<br />

means of the label editor<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 212


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Scenario-Manager<br />

To use this module at least two outputs (switching actuators, dimming actuators, blind<br />

actuators) must be connected via the available communication objects to form a scenario.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

8-fold switch actuator <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> SA.8.16,<br />

MDRC, (6x16A man., 2x8A)<br />

Ref. No.: N000200<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT<br />

Very high quality and unique price-/ performance relationship!<br />

The binary actuator SA.8.16 receives data frames via <strong>EIB</strong> and, with its potential-free,<br />

independent relay contacts, switches up to 10 groups of electric devices. Different outer<br />

conductors can be connected to the outputs A1-A6. The channels A1-A6 contain polarized<br />

latching relays (for capacitive load up to max. 140 µF and lamp load up to max. 2500<br />

W, further details see data sheet relay).One outer conductor each can be connected to<br />

the outputs A7 and A8. The channels A7 and A8 dispose of a change-over contact each<br />

(Opener/Closer).<br />

Comprehensive functions permit several possibilities for parmeterization, such as:<br />

� Switching behaviour of the relays (Open/Close)<br />

� Operating mode of the relays (switching, switching with feedback)<br />

� Definition of switching condition in case of bus failure and recovery<br />

(unchanged/open/closed)<br />

Page 213


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

� Characteristics of the feedback objects (Status, Send, Inverting)<br />

� Logical connections (AND, OR)<br />

� Inverting the connected object (Yes/No)<br />

� Definition of the input objects for bus voltage recovery (logical "0", "1" or read "via <strong>EIB</strong>")<br />

� Time function On and/or switch-off delay<br />

� Time function staircase lighting (retriggerable) with optional switch-off warning<br />

and service function (Cleaning light)<br />

� Time function staircase lighting with abort option by means of "0" frames<br />

(for currently active time function)<br />

� etc.<br />

Using the slide switches 6 relays (output 1-6) can be switched on or off directly by hand<br />

parallel to <strong>EIB</strong>, <strong>KNX</strong> TP1 or even without <strong>EIB</strong>, <strong>KNX</strong> TP1. In addition to that, these slide<br />

switches serve to show the current switch position. The 8-fold binary actuator SA.8.16 is a<br />

device to be fixed on a 35mm DIN-bar and to be installed in electric distributors. In<br />

combination with the product database and the ETS-Software the actuator serves to switch<br />

up to 10 independent groups of electric devices with different functions each. Several<br />

different software settings permit application of logical connections, switch-on and off delays<br />

and staircase lighting functions with adjustable switch-off warning. Besides the option to<br />

switch the connected devices in a defined way in case of a bus malfunction, it is possible to<br />

update the current object values in case of a bus recovery. Power supply of the device is<br />

provided exclusively via the <strong>EIB</strong>, no other power supply is required. Connection to the<br />

bus (<strong>EIB</strong>, <strong>KNX</strong> TP1) is ensured by means of the supplied bus terminal. Connection of the<br />

devices is ensured by means of integrated screw terminals. The outputs A1 to A6 are capable<br />

of switching loads with a current of up to 16 A by means of potential-free contacts. Using the<br />

switch position displays of the outputs A1 to A6 it is also possible to switch the connected<br />

load circuits manually - even in case of bus failure. The outputs A7 and A8 switch loads with<br />

a current of max. 8 A. Doing so, two groups of devices each can be switched potential-free<br />

with one opener and one closer. (change-over contact).<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> basic set 64 channel, incl. logic module<br />

and power supply<br />

Ref. No.: e160<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT<br />

The basic set has been designed for basic equipment with the most important<br />

components at a reasonable price!<br />

The basic kit can be programmed very normally with the ETS2 and ETS3 PRO.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> basic set 1 plus consists of:<br />

Page 214


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

1 pc. Power supply unit with throttle,<br />

1 pc. Power supply unit to supply the interface modules,<br />

2 pcs. Universal input and output concentrator 32-fold <strong>EIB</strong> (<strong>EIB</strong>-Interface),<br />

"n" pcs. Binary outputs 8-fold 230V,manual operation, RM, 16A/10A,<br />

"n" pcs. Binary inputs 8-fold 24V-AC/DC,<br />

"n" pcs. Binary inputs 8-fold 230V-AC,<br />

2 pcs. Connecting lines VL-1 (to connect the interface modules with the concentrator)<br />

1 pcs. Logic module (For complex control functions.)<br />

8 pcs. Connecting comb 8-fold<br />

Info:<br />

With this set you dispose of hardware to install a complete <strong>EIB</strong> line as well as the above<br />

delivery volume. The package includes 64 pcs. channels to operate devices (lamps, sockets,<br />

heating valves etc.), or 64 pcs. channels as bus inputs (window contacts, malfunction<br />

indicators, push-buttons etc.), or a mixed configuration of binary inputs and binary outputs<br />

because from now on you can determine yourself the type and quantity of binary inputs<br />

8-fold or binary outputs 8-fold you require without any extra costs.<br />

Universal Dimming actuator<br />

2-fold, MDRC<br />

Ref. No.: N167607<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: JUNG<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 3602REG<br />

The universal dimming actuator receives telegrams for switching or dimming purposes. It<br />

can work with the principle of trailing or leading edge control. That means either low voltage<br />

halogen lamps with TRONIC transformer or conventional (inductive) transformer can be<br />

controlled. The max. capacity can be extended by using power amplifiers (see main<br />

catalogue).Depending on the parameter it is possible to activate various additional functions.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 215


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Scenario-Manager<br />

(01) Nominal value regulator 0-100 % (set value) for max. 6 channels dimming function<br />

(02) Selector switch for the scenario switching groups 07-10 with the possible functions<br />

"Off", "No" and "On"<br />

(03) Selector switch for the scenario switching groups 11-14 with the possible functions<br />

"Off", "No" and "On"<br />

(04) Key block "Scene memory" to store the scenes<br />

(05) Key block "Scene call" to call up the stored scenes<br />

(06) Information display to show the current scene<br />

(07) User-defined dimming group labelling by means of the label editor<br />

(08) User-defined module labelling by means of the label editor<br />

(09) Display of the current system time & date<br />

(10) Module designation for internal projects (designation is used in the database for quick<br />

identification)<br />

(11) Display of the current page in the media console<br />

(12) Navigation link main menu<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Media Console")<br />

(13) Navigation link submenu media console<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Scenario Manager"<br />

(14) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

Page 216


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Using the scenario manager you can handle your desired scenes conveniently. You can<br />

execute the scene call (05) directly from the scenario manager or externally by using the<br />

push-button switch (send value) installed in the room. The scenes can be called externally<br />

(Universal or Multi-function key) by means of the following values (EIS 14, 1Byte):<br />

Scene/value:<br />

Call scene 01: Send value "0"<br />

Call scene 02: Send value "1"<br />

Call scene 03: Send value "2"<br />

Call scene 04: Send value "3"<br />

Call scene 05: Send value "4"<br />

Call scene 06: Send value "5"<br />

Call scene 07: Send value "6"<br />

Call scene 08: Send value "7"<br />

The operating terminal does not need to be on for "Lichtszene aufrufen extern". Only the<br />

process server must be active on the bus.<br />

The module is graphically divided into several areas. First, all available channels and the<br />

scene names should be labelled individually using the label editor (14) to get a good<br />

overview. After having completed all labels and entered all group addresses at the available<br />

communication objects, you can adjust the scenes.<br />

Page 217


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

In the centre there are the 6 rotary regulators (01) for the dimmable lighting groups that<br />

communicate via a 1Byte object with your dimming actuators (set value). Here, the nominal<br />

value can be set individually from 0 to 100 % for each scene. This corresponds to 0-255<br />

possible dimming levels. The rotary regulators do not send their value to the bus until the<br />

set regulator has been released.<br />

(Info: Each of these channels (set value 1Byte) disposes of its own clock programme in the<br />

operating terminal.) In every scene, three conditions can be assigned to the switching<br />

groups in the scenario manager (group 07-14) (02)(03) "Off", "No", "On". For<br />

motor-controlled applications this would be "Up", "No", "Down" (value 1Bit: "0", "-", "1").<br />

Thanks to the condition "No" it is possible not to make any transmission on the bus for the<br />

selected group in the current scene. This is also the ideal application for motor-controlled<br />

processes (blind) to avoid a constant up and down movement or new positioning for devices<br />

such as blinds as soon as the scene is changed (keeps the current blind position for the next<br />

scene).<br />

After having made all adjustments as desired, the scene can be stored (04). To do so,<br />

simply press the desired scene memory and the following safety question pops up:<br />

This question (15) can only be confirmed or cancelled.<br />

Hint:<br />

Do not leave this active question window (15) in the operating terminal open without<br />

confirmation since this might lead to a blocking of other calculation processes.<br />

After having assigned the scenes, they can also be started directly in the scenario manager<br />

Page 218


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

using the key block "Call scene" (05) or by means of the communication object for external<br />

scene call. A big information display (06) informs you about the currently selected scenario.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 219


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Scenario-Manager<br />

Within the project software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group addresses<br />

can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list scenario manager:<br />

Module MS001:<br />

Inputs:<br />

Page 220


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

External scene call:<br />

Module name: MS001<br />

Name communication object: Lichtszene aufrufen extern<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 14 (1 Byte)<br />

Outputs:<br />

06 pcs. outputs, set value (dimmer):<br />

Module name: LI001<br />

Name communication object: Leuchte D01W - Leuchte D06W<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 6 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

08 pcs. outputs, switching:<br />

Module name: LI001<br />

Name communication object: Leuchte S09, S10, S19, S20, S29, S30, S39, S40<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (1 Bit)<br />

Page 221


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 222


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Audio Console<br />

Audio Console<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 223


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Audio Console<br />

The audio console was integrated to control audio systems (e.g. WHD) by means of an<br />

operating console for multi room stereo sound via two separate stereo channels (4 outputs)<br />

for any desired room assignment. Several concealed power amplifiers can be connected to<br />

the 2 stereo channels of the audio actuator to permit loudspeaker installation (depending on<br />

the planned room number). You can, for example, assign one channel to the rooms: kitchen,<br />

utility room, child, bathroom, terrace etc.. and the other output to the bedroom in order to<br />

use also additional functions (wake-up). By means of a push-button switch near the bed the<br />

system can, for example, be set in parallel (On/Off, Volume etc.). If several, separately<br />

controlled rooms are to be handled, the number of audio actuators must be increased<br />

accordingly.<br />

In ©IQHOME.NET it is possible to connect the different available communication objects with<br />

external <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> audio systems to make specific adjustments comfortable. From booster<br />

activation via source selection (sound source) up to the volume adjustments for individual<br />

areas, many parameters can be modified. Automatic controls by means of clock programmes<br />

for booster On/Off, source selection and volume adjustment offer additional comfort.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 224


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Audio Console<br />

The audio console serves as comfortable and automatic control of an audio system with 2<br />

stereo outputs and has the following functions and features:<br />

� Activation of <strong>EIB</strong> audio systems (e.g. WHD, see www.eibmarkt.com)<br />

� Operating console for one Multi Room Stereo acoustic irradiation (audio actuator)<br />

� 2 separate stereo channels (4 outputs) for any room assignment<br />

� Both boosters can be activated separately and each is equipped with a separate clock<br />

program<br />

� 4-fold source selection (e.g. TV, TU, CD, PC) each controlled separately and equipped<br />

with clock program<br />

� Volume regulator 0-100% for each booster with separate clock program<br />

� Clock programs permit automatic wake-up functions (cyclical volume increase) and<br />

atmosphere<br />

� Highness, lowness, balance, area call, mute functions etc. can be parameterized for each<br />

stereo output<br />

� Output of any *wav files with the most different activities (wake-up, fire alarm, burglar<br />

alarm, presence simulation)<br />

� Audio signal output from PC to any audio system possible (e.g. WHD), sound board<br />

required<br />

� In the „Tel“ version even computer animated audio output (sound board - source PC) in<br />

case of data point modification possible<br />

� Individual labelling of the room names<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 225


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Audio Console<br />

To use this module an <strong>EIB</strong> audio actuator must be connected via the available<br />

communication objects.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> Audio-Actuator AM 840<br />

Ref. No.: N460003<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: WHD<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: AM 840<br />

By using the Audio Actuator AM 840, you can create a complete multi-room audio system<br />

controlled by <strong>EIB</strong>. Audio sources, volume and tone can be controlled individually in every<br />

room. The AM 840 is able to take up to 8 mono or 4 stereo sources, which can be<br />

independently directed to outputs of 4 mono or 2 stereo zones. It can also be cascaded to<br />

give additional zones. The AM 840 is a DIN rail mounted device with a metal case that<br />

provides good electrical and mechanical shielding.<br />

Technical data<br />

� Audio-inputs: 8 Mono or 4 Stereo<br />

� Input voltage: 5 V AC<br />

� Input impedance: 100 kOhm<br />

� Audio-outputs: 4 Mono or 2 Stereo<br />

� Output voltage: 5 V AC<br />

� Output impedance: 47 Ohm<br />

� Control outputs: 4x 0-10 VDC<br />

� Switched outputs: 4x 24 VDC, max. 10 A<br />

� Terminals: Screw type + D-Sub<br />

� Tone control: Bass, Highs: +/- 14 dB; Mids: - 4 dB / 3,5 kHz<br />

� Power supply: 24 VDC, 180 mA + 0,8 A per Amp 10 DC<br />

Page 226


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

� Dimensions: 208 x 89 x 60 mm (DIN rail case)<br />

� Weight: 0,7 kg<br />

� Operating features: Amplifier on/off, volume, source selection, mandatory-/ zone<br />

broadcast<br />

� Tone control: Bass, Mids, Highs<br />

� Frequency range:Mikrophone: 30-16 000 Hz (-1,5 dB)<br />

� Line: 30-20 000 Hz (-1,5 dB)<br />

� Distortion: < 0.1%<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 227


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Audio Console<br />

(01) Button to activate (On/Off) the booster 01<br />

(02) Sound source selection (source 01-04) VS 01<br />

(03) Nominal value input treble booster 01 (each alternatively 0-100% or bit by bit)<br />

(04) Nominal value input bass booster 01 (each alternatively 0-100% or bit by bit)<br />

(05) Nominal value input balance booster 01 (each alternatively -100 100% or bit by<br />

bit)<br />

(06) Nominal value input volume booster 01 (0-100%)<br />

(07) Nominal value input for midrange filter (MI), mute (MU) and zone call (ZC) of the<br />

booster 01<br />

(08) User-defined labelling of the stereo output booster 01 by means of label editor<br />

(09) Button to activate (On/Off) booster 02<br />

(10) Sound source selection (source 01-04) booster 02<br />

(11) Nominal value input treble booster 02 (each alternatively 0-100% or bit by bit)<br />

(12) Nominal value input bass booster 02 (each alternatively 0-100% or bit by bit)<br />

(13) Nominal value input balance booster 02 (each alternatively -100 100% or bit by<br />

bit)<br />

(14) Nominal value input volume booster 02 (0-100%)<br />

(15) Nominal value input for midrange filter (MI), mute (MU) and zone call (ZC) of the<br />

booster 02<br />

(16) User-defined labelling of the stereo output booster 02 by means of label editor<br />

(17) User-defined labelling 01 of the module by means of label editor<br />

(18) User-defined labelling 02 of the module by means of label editor<br />

(19) Display of current system time & date<br />

(20) Module designation for internal projects (designation is used in the database for quick<br />

identification)<br />

(21) Obligatory call of all channels On/Off<br />

(22) Navigation link main menu<br />

(Button being presses with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Media Console")<br />

(23) Navigation link submenu media console<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Audio Console"<br />

(24) Navigation link to submenu scenario manager of the media console<br />

(25) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

(26) Clock programme for automatic booster activation (On/Off) of both stereo outputs (one<br />

separate clock channel each)<br />

(27) Clock programme for automatic volume regulation (Volume) of both stereo outputs<br />

(one separate clock channel each)<br />

(28) Clock programme for automatic source selection (1-4) of both stereo outputs (one<br />

separate clock channel each)<br />

Page 228


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Activate the respective stereo output by means of the button marked with the symbol „Mains<br />

switch“ (01)(09). This function can also be controlled automatically by the respective clock<br />

programme (26). Use the source selector switch (02)(10) to choose the connected sound<br />

source. This function can also be controlled automatically by the respective clock programme<br />

(26).<br />

The rotary regulator and Plus/Minus (03)(04)(05)(11)(12)(13) keys serve to adjust<br />

treble, bass and balance. Depending on the type of audio system connected, the rotary<br />

regulator or the plus/minus key can be used alternatively. Using the rotary regulators the<br />

nominal values are given as absolute (1 Byte). Using the plus/minus keys the data is given<br />

"bit by bit". Press the key once to increase (+) or decrease (-) the nominal value by one<br />

step. Sending a "0" (+) key increases the nominal value, with a "1" (-) key it decreases until<br />

a limit is reached. This is applicable for the treble and bass nominal values. For balance<br />

nominal value adjustment the value is given as Byte value (EIS 14.001) (-100% 100%<br />

= output value -128 127, converted into -127 127). Internally, the conversions<br />

are already included at the regulator. However, it is also possible to adjust the balance “bit<br />

by bit” using the respective available <strong>EIB</strong> communication object as follows: Sending a "0"<br />

(+) key the volume of the right output increases by the value "1", the volume of the left<br />

output decreases by the value "1". Sending a "1" (-) key inverts the process.<br />

Use the keys (07)(15) to call the additional functions (On/Off) for the midrange filter (MI),<br />

mute (MU) and zone call (ZR) at the respective stereo output. An LED (blue) shows the<br />

current output status.<br />

Page 229


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The volume regulator (volume) (06)(14) can be used to set the volume of the respective<br />

booster to a fixed value. Sending the value "0" (0-100%) the booster is switched off, for any<br />

other value the volume is immediately set to this value. In addition to that the balance is<br />

reset. Respective feedback addresses should always be entered at these available<br />

©IQHOME.NET communication objects to update external modifications. The volume<br />

regulators can also be controlled automatically with the given clock programme (27).<br />

Use this key (21) to switch the obligatory call on or off. W hen the obligatory call is active,<br />

the text "PR" in the key flashes red. The obligatory call serves to make announcements that<br />

can be heard in the entire building. After activation, the gong of the obligatory call is played<br />

first and then each booster is switched over to the obligatory call channel and obligatory call<br />

volume. As long as the obligatory call is active the boosters do not respond to other<br />

commands.<br />

The module labels (17)(18) can be made as desired using the label editor (25).<br />

The Professional version offers many more options to integrate additional functions such as:<br />

� Output of any *.wav, *.mp3 files for the most different activities (wake-up, fire<br />

alarm, burglar alarm, presence simulation)<br />

� The additional module "Tel" permits a computer-controlled voice output (sound board<br />

- source PC) for data point modifications<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 230


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Audio Console<br />

Within the project software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group addresses<br />

can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list audio console:<br />

Module MS002:<br />

Outputs:<br />

Page 231


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

02 pcs. mute control (Mute):<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Mute - AUDIO_S02 Mute<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. source selection:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle 1-4 - AUDIO_S02 Quelle 1-4<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 14 (1Byte)<br />

02 pcs. balance:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Balance - AUDIO_S02 Quelle Balance<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 14 (1Byte, signed, regulator -100 % 100 %, output -128<br />

127)<br />

02 pcs. balance step:<br />

Page 232


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Balance Step - AUDIO_S02 Quelle<br />

Balance Step<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. bass:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Bass - AUDIO_S02 Quelle Bass<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 6 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

02 pcs. bass step:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Bass Step - AUDIO_S02 Quelle Bass<br />

Step<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. treble:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Höhen - AUDIO_S02 Quelle Höhen<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 6 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

02 pcs. treble:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Höhen Step - AUDIO_S02 Quelle<br />

Höhen Step<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. midrange:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Mitten E/A - AUDIO_S02 Quelle<br />

Mitten E/A<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. source step (option, not included in visu surface [Terminal]):<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Step - AUDIO_S02 Quelle Step<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. zone call:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Quelle Zonenruf - AUDIO_S02 Quelle<br />

Zonenruf<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. booster On/Off:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Verstärker EA - AUDIO_S02 Verstärker EA<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

02 pcs. volume:<br />

Module name: MS002<br />

Page 233


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Name communication object: AUDIO_S01 Volume - AUDIO_S02 Volume<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 6 (1 Byte, Float)<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 234


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Sensor System Toolbar<br />

Sensor System Toolbar<br />

Page 235


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 236


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Sensor System Toolbar<br />

The sensor system toolbar serves to prepare and scale the sensor data that are processed for<br />

all other function in ©IQHOME.NET (outside lighting, 4-side blind automatics, climate<br />

console etc.) as well as to monitor sensor information.<br />

Because some of the function modules provided in ©IQHOME.NET need this information for<br />

calculations, the connected sensors must be prepared accordingly.<br />

Example: You have integrated a wind sensor in your <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> system and this wind sensor<br />

disposes of a type 2 Byte communication object but sends the data only in km/h. Since<br />

©IQHOME.NET works with m/s, the sensor must be prepared first. This is done by means of<br />

an offset & factor. To convert the value from km/h into m/s, offset must be set to "1" and<br />

the factor to "0,36", and that’s it.<br />

This module also permits a multitude of other possibilities such as the parallel translation<br />

(adding / subtracting fixed values to / from the sensor input value) or the mistake correction<br />

of sensor inputs by multiplying with any given factor etc.. A cycle monitoring for each<br />

sensor, that can be switched on separately, can also be activated.<br />

All available sensor inputs are defined in the module weather station sensor system and are<br />

provided in the sensor system toolbar provided that <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> sensors are connected via the<br />

communication objects.<br />

Depending on the desired function combinations, up to 10 sensors can be connected. To use<br />

the 4-side blind automatics at least one brightness sensor is required which can be defined<br />

and selected as current value for all four sides. If you prefer separate brightness sensors for<br />

each side, you can also connect them. For the outside lighting matrix, for example, at least<br />

one twilight sensor switching (1Bit) or as 2Byte sensor value (resolution 0-255 o. 1000lux) is<br />

required for control unless you refuse the integration of sensor-controlled functions.<br />

That means, the minimum requirements to make full use of the available ©IQHOME.NET<br />

functions are one brightness and one twilight sensor.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 237


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Sensor System Toolbar<br />

Sensor administration of up to 10 sensor inputs with the following functions & features:<br />

� Scalable measured value processing for one brightness sensor in general<br />

� Scalable measured value processing for one twilight sensor<br />

� Scalable measured value processing for one wind sensor in m/s, km/h and wind speed in<br />

standard steps and text<br />

� Status display of a rain sensor<br />

� Scalable measured value processing for 4 brightness sensors assigned to the building<br />

sides<br />

� Weather data recording<br />

� Display in tables or charts with different representation filters, variable time periods,<br />

print function<br />

� Definable sensor monitoring (cyclical time monitoring)<br />

� Connectable frame indicator<br />

� Display of all sensor system measured values<br />

� User-defined labelling of the sensors<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 238


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Sensor System Toolbar<br />

To use this module, at least one sensor must be connected via the available communication<br />

objects. To use the functions provided in ©IQHOME.NET we recommend at least one<br />

brightness sensor and one twilight sensor or a brightness sensor with a very high resolution.<br />

If you want to make use of all functions and tools we recommend the additional connection,<br />

of a wind, rain and temperature sensor. However, this is not absolutely necessary for the<br />

functions in ©IQHOME.NET. The outside temperature, for example, can be connected directly<br />

via the available communication object if a Viessmann interface is integrated. Now, the<br />

existing outside temperature sensor of the heating is provided as communication object of<br />

the interface.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

Description<br />

Weather station <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

Ref. No.: N300057<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: THEBEN<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 132 9 200<br />

• Records wind speed, rain, brightness and temperature<br />

• The measured variables can be transmitted directly on the bus.<br />

• Wind speed, brightness, temperature are transmitted as values, rain as 1 bit<br />

• Wind speed can be transmitted either in m/s or km/h<br />

• The data are evaluated in the device itself<br />

• Powered from bus voltage, 230 V are required if rain sensors are used<br />

• Brightness range 1–100,000 lux<br />

• Temperature range –20 °C ... +55 °C<br />

• 4 universal channels (AND linked)<br />

• 3 sun protection channels (specifically for blind and shutter application)<br />

• A teach-in feature for the brightness threshold is available. It enables thresholds to be set<br />

retrospectively by the push of a button without the device having to be reconfigured.<br />

Page 239


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

• Integrated bus coupler<br />

• Integrated heater for rain sensor<br />

• Automated sun protection mechanism for independent control of blind, awning etc.<br />

• The teach-in features are user-friendly and enable the customer to retrospectively define<br />

the threshold with the touch of a button. This does not require the weather station to be<br />

re-configured.<br />

• The automated sun protection mechanism independently controls the blind<br />

(shutter/awning) during the day, no manual intervention necessary. When a threshold is<br />

reached, two separate messages can be sent, e.g. for height and slat of a blind or a value<br />

and switching message.<br />

• The different channels can have any configuration<br />

Benefits<br />

• The only <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> weather station that records and evaluates all variables in one housing.<br />

• Device is connected directly to the bus, no other cables need be laid.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 240


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Sensor System Toolbar<br />

(01) Display of the 10 possible sensor inputs, consecutive numbers<br />

(02) Display of the unscaled measured value of the sensor (current value input)<br />

(03) Input of the factor for measured value scaling (Standard = 1) for possible<br />

conversions/mistake corrections<br />

(04) Free designation text for each sensor by means of the label editor<br />

(05) Input of an offset value for measured value scaling (Standard = 0, addition-subtraction<br />

to/from current value)<br />

(06) Current toolbar sensor output value for all other calculations<br />

(07) Slide regulator for manual value transmissions (current value input), represents also<br />

the current value<br />

(08) Activating the cycle monitoring for the sensor input by entering a monitoring time in<br />

seconds<br />

(09) Status display (malfunction) when cycle monitoring is active<br />

(10) Navigation link to the next module with the sensors 07-10<br />

(11) Navigation link back to the weather station sensor system<br />

(12) User-defined module labelling<br />

(13) User-defined module labelling<br />

(14) Display of the current system time & date<br />

(15) Module designation for internal projects (designation is used in the database for quick<br />

identification)<br />

(16) Navigation link main menu<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Tools")<br />

(17) Navigation link submenu tools<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Weather station sensor system "<br />

(18) Navigation link submenu tools/weather station sensor system<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example<br />

"Sensor system toolbar"<br />

(19) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

Page 241


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The sensor system toolbar mainly serves to prepare the measured values of the sensor<br />

system for further internal calculations in ©IQHOME.NET since, meanwhile, there are many<br />

different <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> weather stations with different measured value resolutions. For the<br />

brightness sensors, for example, ©IQHOME.NET calculates with values/resolutions of<br />

0-100000 lux and displays in klux. The provided communication objects for the brightness<br />

sensors are of type 2Byte (EIS 5 Float). If the weather station you use can work with an<br />

output in lux, no adaptations have to be made. But if the weather station sends only in klux,<br />

this value must be multiplied by 1000, i.e. the value must be entered.<br />

as "Factor" (03).<br />

The input "Sensor Wind" serves only as a display in ©IQHOME.NET. The provided<br />

communication object is also of type 2Byte (EIS 5 Float) and has a value range/resolution of<br />

0-40 m/s. If your weather station can work with the output in m/s, no adaptations have to<br />

be made. If it works with km/h, the value must be entered as "Factor" (03).<br />

That means, the weather station you use (analogue value) regards every incoming current<br />

value as rough value which can be scaled as desired by entering a "Factor" (03) and "Offset"<br />

(05). Thus, comprehensive conversions, mistake corrections and other adaptations of the<br />

sensor inputs are possible. The value "Offset" (05) serves to add /subtract fixed values<br />

to/from incoming rough values. The respective rough value (sensor input) is shown under<br />

"Measured value" (02) (unscaled). The scaled value (after factor/offset) is shown under<br />

"curr. value" (06).<br />

Using the cycle monitoring function (08) in the toolbar each sensor can be time-monitored<br />

Page 242


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

separately. It is monitored whether, within a set period such as 600 seconds, a telegram is<br />

received from the weather station. If there is no telegram within this period, a sensor<br />

malfunction (09) is indicated by all displays as well as in the alarm list and the alarm output<br />

"Sensor SSM" is set to logic "1". This function is active when at least one cycle monitoring<br />

is on. This object is also backed by the SMS Port (MG 00).<br />

Each sensor can get any label by means of the label editor (19) which is then provided for<br />

all other displays and drop down menus within ©IQHOME.NET. Using the slide switch (07)<br />

you can simulate manual sensor values of a weather station. Incoming telegrams can also be<br />

viewed by means of the telegram indicator in the module weather station sensor system. At<br />

the same time, this regulator represents the current sensor input value provided a sensor<br />

input has been connected (slide switch shifts with every incoming telegram).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 243


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Sensor System Toolbar<br />

Sensor inputs, see data point list <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

or weather station sensors!<br />

Within the project software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group addresses<br />

can be used.<br />

Page 244


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list sensor system toolbar:<br />

Module SD001:<br />

Output:<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

Alarm output sensor system collective malfunction message:<br />

Module name: SD001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor SSM<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 245


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Time Switches<br />

Time Switches<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 246


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Time Switches<br />

The clock module in ©IQHOME.NET replaces the otherwise required <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> timer clocks in<br />

form of hardware to be installed in the distribution (REG). The Basic version already disposes<br />

of 22 free available timer clock channels with endless switching dates/times. A time and<br />

date synchronization of other bus components (e.g. <strong>EIB</strong> auxiliary clocks, displays, mini<br />

panels, function modules, regulating systems etc.) is ensured through the cyclical (variably<br />

adjustable) output of PC system time/date on the <strong>EIB</strong>. A radio-controlled synchronization by<br />

means of DCF signal can be realized using a conventional PC-USB DCF radio-controlled clock<br />

that is available on the market. Thus, for example, an automatic switch-over from summer<br />

and winter daylight saving time and a 100% precision are guaranteed. When you buy this<br />

device outside Germany, make sure that the DCF radio signal can be received in your region.<br />

In addition to the standard week and year programme any other programme can be added<br />

and defined as standard. Holiday programmes, single day programmes etc. can be handled<br />

as easily as copy and reset functions. Each clock channel disposes of a manual operation<br />

option by means of push button. An integrated LED shows the current clock status.<br />

The clock channels permit to realize any time combinations for your facility functions and<br />

applications. The timer clocks are available in all EIS types (Professional version, Basic<br />

version only 1Bit "On/Off") and can be defined individually. For example, one clock can<br />

switch on the well and the other can carry out dimming functions or send specific values at<br />

specific times.<br />

Thanks to a user-friendly and easy operation, time and date management is quick and<br />

uncomplicated. In the Professional version any number of clocks can be adapted,<br />

theoretically one for each single data point. The limit of clock channels with an endless<br />

number of switching dates is only limited by the licence you acquired for the data point<br />

number (group addresses).<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 247


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Time Switches<br />

Control of up to 22 free available timer clock channels with unlimited switching dates/times<br />

and the following features and functions:<br />

� 22 time switch channels for free application (in addition to the clock channels already<br />

used for blind and outside lighting control)<br />

� Day, week and year program<br />

� Manual operation possible with status display for each channel<br />

� Special days and individual programs<br />

� Display and output of current time/date as <strong>EIB</strong>-frame (cycl. variably adjustable) on the<br />

bus in <strong>EIB</strong> format, if a PC-DCF clock is used even prepared to receive date/ time by radio<br />

signal.<br />

� User-defined labelling of the time switch channels<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 248


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Time Switches<br />

To use this module there are no further requirements since this module does not call for<br />

specific <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> hardware.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 249


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Time Switches<br />

(01) Display of the 22 timer clock channels, continuously numbered<br />

(02) Free designation text for each channel by means of label editor<br />

(03) Call of the date administration assigned to the clock channel<br />

(04) Channel-related manual operation switch ("On/OFF" function) with LED status display<br />

(05) Current PC system time<br />

(06) Current PC system date (day & date)<br />

(07) User-defined module designation<br />

(08) Module designation for internal projects (designation is used in the database for quick<br />

identification)<br />

(09) Navigation link main menu<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Tools")<br />

(10) Navigation link submenu tools<br />

(Button being pressed with active, lashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Clocks"<br />

(11) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

(12) Current date management of the sample clock 18<br />

(13) Zoom function (magnifying glass) for a higher resolution in the time line window<br />

(14) Time line window<br />

(15) Event editor to enter a date/time<br />

(16) Calendar for date management<br />

(17) Programme tools of the timer clock (programme selection and definition, copy functions<br />

etc.)<br />

(18) Export function of the switching dates in *.txt format<br />

Page 250


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

The clock module is very easy to use. The clock channels on the module are continuously<br />

numbered (01). A freely definable text (02) that can be modified by means of the label<br />

editor (11) is assigned to each clock channel. Furthermore, you will find one manual<br />

operation switch each ("ON/OFF" function) with status LED (04) and the respective clock<br />

programme (03) at each channel. The LED shows the current output status of the clock<br />

which can also be switched directly using push-button (04). The push-button works with<br />

"ON/OFF" function, i.e. each time you press the key it inverts the previous key operation<br />

(press "On", press "Off", press "On" ... etc.). A manual manipulation by means of the key will<br />

always be overwritten by subsequent clock telegrams. Thus, manual operation is only<br />

temporary. Start the clock programme by clicking on the clock symbol (03). Now, the<br />

date/time window of the selected clock channel opens (12). Click on the time line window<br />

(14) to enter any time/date. A yellow bar indicates the activated period. Any number of<br />

switching times/dates (15) can be set whereas you can also administrate only "On" or only<br />

"Off" dates/times. The calendar function (16) can be used to define specific programmes.<br />

Arrangements that occur frequently can be handled with the function "Standard programme"<br />

(17). You can, for example, prepare one day with the switching times and assign it<br />

automatically to each weekday. This is also possible for single days or the weekend. In<br />

addition to that, you can copy complete days into other days using the copy function. By<br />

means of the function "Back to the standard programme" and a simple mouse click you can<br />

reset all special switching arrangements you made for one day to the standard programme<br />

without giving any new dates. Using the export function you can export all switching dates of<br />

the respective clock programme as *.txt file.<br />

The cyclical output of the system time/date can be modified variably in the project software<br />

or even switched off. To do so, simply remove the <strong>EIB</strong> port for these data points (group<br />

Page 251


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

addresses). Should you wish to have this information again, the port can be selected again<br />

and the data will be put on the bus and sent to the group addresses at the communication<br />

objects for time and date.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 252


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Time Switches<br />

Within the project software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group addresses<br />

can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list clocks:<br />

Module TI001:<br />

Outputs:<br />

Page 253


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

22 pcs. clock channels:<br />

Module name: TI001<br />

Name communication object: Uhr 01 - Uhr 22<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 254


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Weather station / sensors<br />

Weather <strong>Data</strong> & System Toolbar<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 255


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Weather <strong>Data</strong> & System Toolbar<br />

The module weather station sensor system serves to display analogue measured values such<br />

as those of a weather station in a clear and central way. The module disposes of different<br />

measuring and display instruments. Using the integrated telegram indicator you can check<br />

whether measured values are received. Thanks to the history administration the measured<br />

values can be evaluated, printed or exported as graphics or table.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 256


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Weather <strong>Data</strong> & System Toolbar<br />

Sensor display with additional functions and history administration of 10 sensors (module<br />

provided for max. 15 sensors) with the following features:<br />

� Scalable measured value processing for one brightness sensor in general Scalable<br />

measured value processing for one twilight sensor<br />

� Scalable measured value processing for one wind sensor in m/s, km/h and wind speed in<br />

standard steps and text<br />

� Status display of a rain sensor<br />

� Scalable measured value processing for 4 brightness sensors assigned to the building<br />

sides<br />

� Weather data recording, Display in tables or charts with different representation filters,<br />

variable time periods, print function<br />

� Definable sensor monitoring (cyclical time monitoring)<br />

� Connectable frame indicator<br />

� Display of all sensor system measured values<br />

� User-defined labelling of the sensors<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 257


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Weather <strong>Data</strong> & System Toolbar<br />

To use this module at least one sensor must be connected via the available communication<br />

objects. To use the functions provided in ©IQHOME.NET we recommend at least one<br />

brightness sensor and one twilight sensor or a brightness sensor with a very high resolution.<br />

If you want to use all displays and tools we recommend the additional connection, of a wind,<br />

rain and temperature sensor. However, this is not absolutely necessary for the<br />

©IQHOME.NET functions.<br />

In our shop (www.eibmarkt.com) we recommend for example:<br />

Description<br />

Weather station <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong><br />

Ref. No.: N300057<br />

(To the input in the search mask)<br />

Manufacturer: THEBEN<br />

Manufacturer Nr.: 132 9 200<br />

• Records wind speed, rain, brightness and temperature<br />

• The measured variables can be transmitted directly on the bus.<br />

• Wind speed, brightness, temperature are transmitted as values, rain as 1 bit<br />

• Wind speed can be transmitted either in m/s or km/h<br />

• The data are evaluated in the device itself<br />

• Powered from bus voltage, 230 V are required if rain sensors are used<br />

• Brightness range 1–100,000 lux<br />

• Temperature range –20 °C ... +55 °C<br />

• 4 universal channels (AND linked)<br />

• 3 sun protection channels (specifically for blind and shutter application)<br />

• A teach-in feature for the brightness threshold is available. It enables thresholds to be set<br />

retrospectively by the push of a button without the device having to be reconfigured.<br />

• Integrated bus coupler<br />

• Integrated heater for rain sensor<br />

• Automated sun protection mechanism for independent control of blind, awning etc.<br />

• The teach-in features are user-friendly and enable the customer to retrospectively define<br />

Page 258


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

the threshold with the touch of a button. This does not require the weather station to be<br />

re-configured.<br />

• The automated sun protection mechanism independently controls the blind<br />

(shutter/awning) during the day, no manual intervention necessary. When a threshold is<br />

reached, two separate messages can be sent, e.g. for height and slat of a blind or a value<br />

and switching message.<br />

• The different channels can have any configuration<br />

Benefits<br />

• The only <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> weather station that records and evaluates all variables in one housing.<br />

• Device is connected directly to the bus, no other cables need be laid.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 259


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Weather <strong>Data</strong> & System Toolbar<br />

The weather station sensor system is a display panel for different measured values.<br />

Resolution is scaled automatically. When the available communication objects are connected<br />

with a weather station or an analogue input via the group addresses, these measured values<br />

are ready for display in this terminal and can be used for other internal calculations &<br />

functions (outside lighting matrix, 4-side blind automatics) as well as other displays. A<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication object is assigned to each measured value display (see data point<br />

list <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong>), e.g. the brightness sensor 01 (Sensor Hell1) (02) or the outside temperature<br />

sensor (Sensor HellAT) (01). Using the slide regulators (03) or keys (04), assigned to the<br />

measured value displays you can test (simulate) the values even without connected sensors.<br />

Sensor connections of the type EIS1 (1Bit) are represented as graphics (05). This refers, for<br />

example, to the sensors rain (Sensor Regen) (04) and twilight switch (Sensor HellDS)<br />

(05). When there is a wind sensor, different displays are activated in the wind sensor<br />

information display (06). At the same time the following values are displayed:<br />

� Display of the current wind situation in standard steps:<br />

> 118 km/h = "Hurricane"<br />

> 103 km/h = "Violent storm"<br />

> 089 km/h = "Heavy storm"<br />

> 075 km/h = "Storm"<br />

> 062 km/h = "Stormy wind"<br />

> 050 km/h = "Stiff breeze"<br />

> 039 km/h = "Strong wind"<br />

> 029 km/h = "Fresh breeze"<br />

> 020 km/h = "Moderate breeze"<br />

> 012 km/h = "Weak breeze"<br />

> 006 km/h = "Light breeze"<br />

> 001 km/h = "Light draught"<br />

= 000 km/h = "Calm"<br />

� Display of the current wind situation in m/s and km/h<br />

� Display of the current wind situation as wind speed<br />

All possibly required scalings and measured value preparations can be made by means of the<br />

sensor system toolbar. Using the integrated telegram indicator (09), that can be switched<br />

on separately, you can check the data flow of the individual sensors. Incoming telegrams are<br />

then represented by means of LED (08) at the measured value display of the respective<br />

sensor.<br />

Page 260


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Telegram indicator<br />

The timers for the telegram indicators are fixed in the programme. An activated sensor<br />

monitoring function (by means of the sensor system toolbar) is also indicated directly by a<br />

flashing „Malfunction“ message at the measured value display as soon as there is a<br />

malfunction (exceeding the cycle monitoring function).<br />

Display "Sensor malfunction" (flashing)<br />

Using the history function (17) all measured values can be administrated as table or chart<br />

(21) with different representation filters, time ranges and print function (24). In the legend<br />

(23) the graphics for the sensors that have possibly been connected are defined. Use the<br />

menu (24) to call the different representations (table, graphics), time ranges and other<br />

functions. The zoom function can be used to define the resolution of the time line. Use the<br />

"Back" (25) key to return to the module weather station sensor system.<br />

The module (10) can be labelled using the label editor (18). To do so, a separate page is<br />

called.<br />

(01) Measured value display of a sensor<br />

(02) Individual labelling of the sensors by means of the label editor of the sensor system<br />

toolbar<br />

(03) Slide regulator to simulate measured values and parallel status display<br />

(04) Operating key to simulate measured values (Bit) and parallel status display (example<br />

rain sensor)<br />

(05) Operating key to simulate measured values (Bit) and parallel status display (example<br />

twilight switch)<br />

(06) Information display for wind situation as text in standard steps, wind speed, m/s and<br />

km/h<br />

(07) Connectable telegram indicator for data flow display of individual sensor telegrams<br />

(08) Telegram indicator display for sensor data flow display<br />

(09) Timer for telegram indicator display<br />

(10) User-defined module labelling<br />

(11) Display of current system time&date<br />

(12) Module designation for internal projects (designation is used in the database for quick<br />

identification)<br />

(13) Navigation link back to "Tools"<br />

(14) Navigation link main menu<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example "<br />

Tools")<br />

Page 261


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

(15) Navigation link submenu Tools<br />

(Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED below, if selected, our example<br />

"Weather station sensor system "<br />

(16) Navigation link submenu to tools/sensor system toolbar<br />

(17) Navigation link submenu to tools/weather station sensor system/history<br />

(18) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

Page 262


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 263


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Weather <strong>Data</strong> & System Toolbar<br />

Within the project software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group addresses<br />

can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list weather station sensor system:<br />

Module SE001:<br />

Inputs:<br />

Page 264


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

Sensor input, outside temperature:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor AT<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor input, brightness 01:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor Hell1<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor input, brightness 02:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor Hell2<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor inpu,t brightness 03:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor Hell3<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor input, brightnesse 04:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor Hell4<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor input, brightness in general:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor HellA<br />

Page 265


<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor input, twilight:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor HellD<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor input, twilight switch:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor HellDS<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

Sensor input, wind:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor Wind<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 5 (2 Byte Float)<br />

Sensor input, rain:<br />

Module name: SE001<br />

Name communication object: Sensor Regen<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 266


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Central Command Terminal<br />

Central Command Terminal and Definition<br />

Page 267


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 268


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Purpose<br />

Central Command Terminal and Definition<br />

The central terminal serves to execute 16 freely definable central building functions of type<br />

1Bit (On/Off) with individual labelling of the central commands. The central terminal<br />

manages up to 10 central commands for E/O-functions such as lighting and up to 6 central<br />

commands Up/Down for blind, roof light and/or garage door controls.<br />

Always 3 out of a total of 10 different central commands can be assigned to up to 80<br />

switching and 6 dimming channels of the operating console with presence simulation. The<br />

central command assignment for blind applications is executed directly at the actuators by<br />

means of ETS.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 269


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Features<br />

Central Command Terminal and Definition<br />

Administration and control of up to 16 central building functions with the following functions<br />

and features:<br />

� Free definition of 10 On/Off central functions and 6 Up/Down central functions for<br />

motor-controlled applications<br />

� Direct activation of the actuator single addresses, thus, no other central address at<br />

actuator required<br />

� Thus, difference between the switching mode of the actuators and e.g. the LED- display<br />

at the key sensor is prevented<br />

� User-defined labelling of the central commands<br />

� Free assignment of max. 3 central commands to each of the 80 individual switching<br />

groups of the operating console<br />

� Simple Drop Down menus to select one central command out of max. 10 definable<br />

commands<br />

� Definition of the switch-on brightness (0-100%) with central „On“ functions for 6<br />

dimmable lighting groups<br />

� Comprehensive combinations<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 270


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Preconditions<br />

Central Command Terminal and Definition<br />

To use this module there are no special requirements. If you do not want to use a central<br />

function, do not use the available communication objects. To do so, just remove the existing<br />

group addresses at these objects.<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 271


General<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Function description<br />

Central Command Terminal and Definition<br />

Using the terminal for „Central commands“ you can prepare any number of central building<br />

functions (max. 10 for switching and dimming groups) and assign these to the respective<br />

switching and dimming groups from the operating console (80 switching and 6 dimming<br />

groups) by means of the module "Central command definition ". All central commands can<br />

be further used in the <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> system e.g. for a central push-button or a lock switch contact<br />

at the front door etc.. Communication objects of this module that are assigned to external<br />

binary inputs etc. will then release the following actions.<br />

Central command module:<br />

In the central command operating field for On/Off functions (01), you will find the<br />

continuous numbers of the commands with label texts that can be edited (02) using the<br />

label editor (14) as well as the operating keys to call the individual commands (03) divided<br />

into either only "On" or "Off" command. When the key is pressed again the commands are<br />

sent again on the bus (Command Befehl). This also refers to the motor central commands<br />

(04) such as blind, awning, roof light and/or garage door control etc.. Here, the operating<br />

keys are divided into only "Up" ("0" telegram) or "Down" ("1" telegram) (05). These<br />

commands too are sent on the bus again when the key is pressed again. (Command Befehl).<br />

Using the navigation key in the submenu (19) you go to the assignment pages (Terminal<br />

Definition).<br />

The integrated operating hour counter (02) was integrated in this central module. It serves<br />

to count the operating hours of any switchable (1Bit) appliance (lamp, pump, valve etc.) in<br />

your facility. It always counts the time during which the appliance is "On" ("1" telegram).<br />

You can enter the name of the monitored appliance in the label editor (14). The display<br />

shows the current operating time in seconds:minutes:seconds, whereas the display is only<br />

updated after every 10 seconds. The values are persistent. Thus, when the latest data is<br />

loaded again when the system is started next. Use the reset key (07) to set the operating<br />

counter to "Zero". The key next to it (08) shows the current status of the monitored<br />

appliance and can also be controlled directly (On/Off).<br />

The surface consists of several operating pages, the central terminal (module ZA001) and<br />

the terminal for central command definition (assignment to the switching and dimming<br />

groups), including the modules ZD001-ZD006:<br />

Central terminal (module ZA001):<br />

(01) Display of the 10 On/Off central building functions<br />

(02) Designation of the 10 On/Off central building functions with individual label option<br />

(03) Key to call the central function, divided into "On" and "Off" command<br />

(04) Display of the 6 Up/Down central building functions<br />

(05) Personal designation of the central building functions with key to call the central<br />

function, divided into "Up" and "Down" command<br />

Page 272


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

(06) Information display of the integrated operating hour counter<br />

(07) Reset key of the operating hour counter<br />

(08) Operating button for the appliance counted with the operating hour counter<br />

(09) User-defined central terminal labelling<br />

(10) Display of the current system time & date<br />

(11) Module designation for internal projects (designation is used in the database for quick<br />

identification)<br />

(12) Navigation link main menu (Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED<br />

below, if selected, our example "Tools")<br />

(13) Navigation link submenu tools (Button being pressed with active, flashing white LED<br />

below, if selected, our example "Central Terminal")<br />

(14) Navigation link to label editor (base menu)<br />

In the label editor you can change the name of the console (16) as well as all 16 central<br />

building functions and the designation of the appliance for the operating hour counter.<br />

Generally, all texts that are marked yellow can be modified in the label editors of the<br />

individual modules by simply clicking on the text (15). Use the arrow key (18) to return to<br />

the main module the labels of which have just been modified.<br />

Page 273


Module central command definition:<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Here, up to 3 central commands (03)(04)(05) can be assigned to the switching and<br />

dimming channels. Marked channels (02) only show the assignment to the scenario<br />

manager.<br />

After having set the functions in the central command module, these are now available in the<br />

drop down menus (06) for free selection and assignment to the individual switching and<br />

dimming groups (01). The individual labels of the switching and dimming group channels<br />

(01-80) are automatically taken from the label editor of the operating console module and,<br />

thus, cannot be modified with the label editor (14) of this module page. Using the label<br />

editor of this page you can change the console name (09). Use the arrow key/s in the<br />

navigation submenu (07) to go to the next or previous page.<br />

By means of a drop down menu each individual group can be matched with one or max.<br />

three of the central commands you defined. For example, you have defined the central<br />

command "Central Total Off ". This command can be entered at all desired groups using the<br />

assignment page "Central command definition". However, the central command "Central off<br />

basement" is to be entered only at all switching and dimming groups in the basement. For<br />

this application, only switching and dimming groups of the basement are assigned to this<br />

command.<br />

Special cases are the slide regulators of the dimmable lights. These can be used to fix the<br />

switch-on values for sample command „Central ON“. At „Central OFF“ the dimmable lights<br />

Page 274


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

switch off, at „Central ON“ the lights go on with the fixed value.<br />

The central commands send their commands directly to the communication objects of the<br />

linked channels (switching and dimming groups), which makes is unnecessary to enter<br />

further group addresses at the actuators and sensors. Thus, a difference between the<br />

actuator switching status and, for example, the LED display at the push-button sensor is<br />

excluded.<br />

Page 275


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 276


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong><br />

Central Command Terminal and Definition<br />

Within the project software the two-digit or three-digit <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> notation for group addresses<br />

can be used.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point list central commands & definition:<br />

Module ZA001:<br />

Outputs:<br />

Page 277


© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

When supplied, all group addresses are entered as standard, which you can adapt to your<br />

facility conditions by deleting or replacing using the project planning software. Several group<br />

addresses can be assigned to one communication object. You will find detailed information in<br />

the technical manual "Project planning".<br />

06 pcs. outputs, central command motor system Up/Down:<br />

Module name: ZA001<br />

Name communication object: Zentral Jalousie 01 - Zentral Jalousie 06<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

10 pcs. outputs, central command On/Off<br />

Module name: ZA001<br />

Name communication object: Zentral E-A 01 - Zentral E-A 10<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> data point type: EIS 1 (Bit)<br />

You will find all descriptions of the individual <strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> communication objects in<br />

the central data point list!<br />

-o--o--o--<br />

Page 278


- 4 -<br />

4-Side blind automatics 170<br />

- A -<br />

Administration 27<br />

Alarm management 54<br />

Alarm outputs 88<br />

Appendix 32<br />

Audio Console 223<br />

- B -<br />

Basic Version 36<br />

Burglar alarm system 71<br />

- C -<br />

Central Command Terminal 267<br />

Central terminal 82<br />

Climate Console 193<br />

- D -<br />

<strong>Data</strong>point groups 43<br />

<strong>Data</strong>point Requests 49<br />

<strong>Data</strong>points 40<br />

Diagnosis 29<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

Index<br />

- E -<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA001 184<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA002 186<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA003 188<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Blind JA004 190<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> <strong>Data</strong> 182, 253, 264, 277, 101, 155, 140, 168, 122, 204, 220, 231, 244<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>/<strong>KNX</strong> Inputs 192<br />

Elvis structure 16<br />

English - Manual 4<br />

Error messages 31<br />

Examples of applications 12<br />

- F -<br />

Features 173, 146, 257, 270, 73, 129, 161, 111, 195, 212, 225, 238, 248<br />

- I -<br />

Info-Alarm-Message 109<br />

Inputs (contacts) 93<br />

Inputs (detectors) 96<br />

Installation 19, 33<br />

Installation 19, 33<br />

Introduction 6<br />

- L -<br />

Load project... 37<br />

Page 279


- M -<br />

Media Console 209<br />

Message ports 56<br />

Message recipients 58<br />

Messages 59<br />

- N -<br />

Navigation 65<br />

- O -<br />

Operating Console 144<br />

Operation 23<br />

Outside lighting matrix 126<br />

© <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>, 1997-2005<br />

- P -<br />

Preconditions 8, 174, 147, 258, 271, 74, 130, 162, 112, 196, 213, 226, 239, 249<br />

Professional Version 60<br />

Project software 35<br />

Purpose 171, 145, 256, 269, 72, 127, 160, 110, 194, 211, 224, 237, 247<br />

Purpose 171, 145, 256, 269, 72, 127, 160, 110, 194, 211, 224, 237, 247<br />

- R -<br />

Reference contact 91<br />

Reminder function 159<br />

RS232/USB-Port 45<br />

- S -<br />

Scenario-Manager 210<br />

Sensor System Toolbar 235<br />

Start screen 67<br />

Start up and terminate 21<br />

Support 64<br />

- T -<br />

Terminal 30<br />

Time Switches 246<br />

Topology 80<br />

- U -<br />

User management 50<br />

User manual 15<br />

- W -<br />

Weather station / sensors 255<br />

Page 280


The details and data contained in this documentation are subject to modification without<br />

prior notice. Without the express written consent of <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong> and IT <strong>GmbH</strong> no part<br />

of this documentation may be duplicated for any purpose whatsoever or transcribed<br />

regardless of the manner or means, electronic or mechanical, by which this is performed.<br />

Copyright © 1997-2005 <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>. All rights reserved.<br />

Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.<br />

<strong>EIB</strong> and ETS are registered trademarks of <strong>EIB</strong>A s.c. Brüssel<br />

The logo is a registered word- and picture mark of <strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong> and <strong>KNX</strong>/<strong>EIB</strong>A s.c.<br />

Brussels.<br />

07/2005<br />

<strong>EIB</strong>MARKT <strong>GmbH</strong>

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!